ENM 19 Operations
for Radio Access
Network
LZU1082810
Intentionally Blank
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM 19 Operations for
Radio Access Network
Accessing ENM
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Accessing ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 3-0
DISCLAIMER
This book is a training document and contains simplifications. Therefore, it must
not be considered as a specification of the system. The contents of this
document are subject to revision without notice due to ongoing progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any
error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
This document is not intended to replace the technical documentation that was
shipped with your system. Always refer to that technical documentation during
operation and maintenance.
© Ericsson AB 2019
This document was produced by Ericsson AB.
The book is to be used for training purposes only and it is strictly prohibited to
copy, reproduce, disclose or distribute it in any manner without the express
written consent from Ericsson.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
0
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Objectives
In this module you will learn to:
— Describe the ENM Access Environment
— Review how ENM User Roles are used in ENM
— Access the ENM Server and log into ENM
— View your user profile
— Change your user password
— Log out of ENM
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Accessing ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 3-1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
1
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM Access Environment
ENM Client
ENM is accessed using a web browser.
Chrome and Firefox are supported
eNB
eNB
eNB
eNB
ENM
Server
eNB
eNB
eNB
eNB
eNB
eNB
eNB
ENM
Client
ENM can be accessed from other user
devices, such as tablets and phones using a
web browser if supported by users network IOS (iPAD) - Safari
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Accessing ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 3-2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
2
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM User Role Overview
— ENM provides default roles for accessing ENM applications
— ENM applications publish a range of capabilities to control user access to the application’s features
— ENM System Administrators can customize user’s profiles and create custom roles
— A users roles will determine the list of applications available on the ENM Launcher
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Accessing ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 3-3
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
3
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Log into ENM
1
3
2
1. Access ENM in your browser.
2. Click “Ok” on the initial window.
3. Enter your log-in credentials
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Accessing ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 3-4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
4
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
View User Profile
Click “View User
Profile” from User
Information
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Accessing ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 3-5
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
5
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Edit Profile
•
Users can change
their name,
surname, and
email address in
Edit Profile.
•
The user roles are
shown at the
bottom of the
window.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Accessing ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 3-6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
6
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Change User Password
1
2
3
Edit Profile
4
5
Note: If your
system uses a
single sign-on
access method you
may not be able to
change your own
password.
To change user password:
1. Click “Edit User Password”
2. Enter current password
3. Enter the new password. The new password must conform to the
requirements displayed in the password policy
4. Repeat the new password
5. Click on “Save Password” button
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Accessing ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 3-7
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
7
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Summary
In this module you have learned to:
— Describe the ENM Access Environment
— Review how ENM User Roles are used in ENM
— Access the ENM Server and log into ENM
— View your user profile
— Change your user password
— Log out of ENM
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Accessing ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 3-8
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
8
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
9
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM 19 Operations for
Radio Access Network
Using the ENM Application Launcher
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Application Launcher | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 4-0
DISCLAIMER
This book is a training document and contains simplifications. Therefore, it must
not be considered as a specification of the system. The contents of this
document are subject to revision without notice due to ongoing progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any
error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
This document is not intended to replace the technical documentation that was
shipped with your system. Always refer to that technical documentation during
operation and maintenance.
© Ericsson AB 2019
This document was produced by Ericsson AB.
The book is to be used for training purposes only and it is strictly prohibited to
copy, reproduce, disclose or distribute it in any manner without the express
written consent from Ericsson.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
0
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Objectives
In this module you will learn to:
— List the features of the Application Launcher
— Describe the Application Launcher Page Layout
— Access the Application Launcher online help
— View basic description of an application and launch applications.
— List applications by categories
— List applications in alphabetical order
— Create Favorite applications and access applications from the favorites view
— Search for applications.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Application Launcher | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 4-1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
1
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM Launcher Overview
— The ENM Launcher is a web-based application
— Applications are grouped by domain, listed
alphabetically or by using the 'Favorites' facility
— The search facility allows a global search on all
applications by acronym or by application
name
— The launcher provides an online help interface
which contains all information needed to
navigate, operate, and troubleshoot the
application
— The list of available applications on the launch
page are depend on each users security roles.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Application Launcher | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 4-2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
2
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Application Launcher Page Layout
Search Box
Action Bar
Application List
Quick Access
Area
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Application Launcher | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 4-3
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
3
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Application Launcher User Interface
— The application list contains all the applications that the user can access
— To launch an application, click on the application name.
— Next to each application is an Info icon and a Favorite icon.
— Click the Info icon to get more information on the application.
— Click the Favorite icon to mark or unmark the application as a favorite.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Application Launcher | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 4-4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
4
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Quick Access Area
• Quick Access to:
• Help Center
• Recently Used
Applications
• Help Tutorials
Note: Help Center is covered in more detail
in the ENM Documentation Module
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Application Launcher | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 4-5
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
5
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Application Launcher User Interface
The Action Bar contains three filter options to help you find applications quickly.
— A to Z
— Applications are listed alphabetically from A to Z.
— Favorites
— Applications used frequently can be marked as a favorite. The Favorites
menu gives you quick access to your marked applications.
— Categories
— Applications are grouped by category. Categories are listed alphabetically.
Applications within each category are also listed alphabetically.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Application Launcher | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 4-6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
6
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Application Search Box
Application Search Box
Application Search Results
— Application Search Box: Find an application by typing its name in the
Application Search box.
— As soon as you start typing, any matches to your search will be
displayed below.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Application Launcher | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 4-7
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
7
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Common User Interface Features –
Navigation
Navigation breadcrumbs allow quick access to previous pages.
This option allows the user to
navigate/move to different
pages in the application.
Pages can also be accessed from the Action bar in some
applications.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Application Launcher | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 4-8
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
8
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Open Application Launcher in a New Tab
Many applications
replace the current tab
when launched from the
ENM launcher page
To open the launcher
page in a new tab right
click on the Ericsson
Network Manager Tab
and select “Open Link in a
New Tab”
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Application Launcher | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 4-9
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
9
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Summary
In this module you have learned to:
— List the features of the Application Launcher
— Describe the Application Launcher Page Layout
— Access the Application Launcher online help
— View basic description of an application and launch applications.
— List applications by categories
— List applications in alphabetical order
— Create Favorite applications and access applications from the favorites view.
— Search for applications.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Application Launcher | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 4-10
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
10
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
11
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM 19 Operations for
Radio Access Network
ENM Documentation
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Documentation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 5-0
DISCLAIMER
This book is a training document and contains simplifications. Therefore, it must
not be considered as a specification of the system. The contents of this
document are subject to revision without notice due to ongoing progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any
error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
This document is not intended to replace the technical documentation that was
shipped with your system. Always refer to that technical documentation during
operation and maintenance.
© Ericsson AB 2019
This document was produced by Ericsson AB.
The book is to be used for training purposes only and it is strictly prohibited to
copy, reproduce, disclose or distribute it in any manner without the express
written consent from Ericsson.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
0
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Objectives
In this module you will learn to:
— List the available ENM documentation
— Access and view ENM online Help
— Access and view the Customer Product Information (CPI) using ALEX
— Access and view ENM command documentation using the Command Line Interface
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Documentation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 5-1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
1
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM Documentation
› ENM Online Application
Help
› Customer Product
Information (CPI) using
ALEX
› ENM command
documentation using CLI
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Documentation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 5-2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
2
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM Help Center
›
›
›
On any ENM application, access the Online Help Center by expanding the
help icon in the upper right-hand corner of the EMN window and clicking
“Help Center”.
The Help Center can also be accessed by clicking on the “Help Center” icon
on the Application Launcher page.
The Help Center provides quick access to all online help in ENM
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Documentation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 5-3
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
3
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Help Center – Access ENM Application
Help Center
The Help Center
provides access
to all the ENM
Application Help
by category.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Documentation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 5-4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
4
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Help Center - Download Managed Object Model
Files
The Help Center allows downloading selected of the Managed Object
Models (MOMs) available in the ENM deployment.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Documentation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 5-5
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
5
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Access ENM Application Help
›
›
To access the Online App Help for a application, expand the help icon
in the upper right-hand corner of the ENM window and click on App
Help
Online App Help is specific to the current application being displayed
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Documentation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 5-6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
6
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM Application Help
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Documentation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 5-7
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
7
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Application Help - Overview
The Overview section of the online help provides details on
features and functions of the application
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Documentation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 5-8
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
8
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Application Help – User Interface
The User Interface section of the application help provides
instructions on how to use the application’s user interface
components.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Documentation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 5-9
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
9
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Application Help - Tutorials
The Help
Tutorials
provide step by
step
instructions for
performing
tasks within the
application.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Documentation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 5-10
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
10
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Application Help – Frequently Asked Questions
Some ENM
applications
include a
Frequently Asked
Questions (FAQ)
section to provide
additional
information to the
user.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Documentation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 5-11
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
11
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Application Help - Search
To locate information on
a search term in the
Application Help:
› Type the search term
into the App Help
search box.
›
A list of help topics
within the current
application will be
listed
›
Click on the topic to
access the information
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Documentation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 5-12
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
12
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Open CPI using ALEX
Active Library Explorer (ALEX) is software that allows users to browse Ericsson Customer
Product Information (CPI) libraries in a standard web browser
›
Select “Alex” from the ENM Application Launcher under the Documentation category
›
Select the library you want to view.
›
The selected Alex library will open in a new browser window
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Documentation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 5-13
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
13
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Alex – Search for Documents
To search for documents in an Alex Library
› Type the search term in search box.
›
›
Click on the magnifying icon.
A list of documents containing the search term will be listed.
›
Click on the document name to open the document.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Documentation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 5-14
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
14
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Key Documents
•
•
ENM Library
•
ENM Platform Administration related documentation
•
Network Impact Report
•
Supported Network Elements
•
ENM platform specific alarm instructions
Node Libraries
•
Network Impact Report
•
Node specific alarm instructions
•
Managed Object detail
•
Node configuration Information
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Documentation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 5-15
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
15
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Access ENM Command Line Interface(CLI)
Documentation
›
›
To access the ENM Command Line Interface (CLI)
documentation, select the ENM CLI application located in the
Provisioning Category on the ENM Launcher page.
Click Command Line Interface to launch the CLI.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Documentation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 5-16
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
16
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM CLI “help”
To view help on the ENM CLI command sets:
Type “help” at the ENM CLI command prompt
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Documentation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 5-17
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
17
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM CLI – “help cmedit”
› To view help on a command set’s commands use the syntax , “help <command set>.
› For example, to get help on the cmedit command set commands, enter “help cmedit” at the
command prompt
› To open the additional help in CLI Application help, click on the icon at end of a command help
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Documentation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 5-18
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
18
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Summary
In this module you have learned to:
— List the available ENM documentation
— Access and view ENM online Help
— Access and view the Customer Product Information (CPI) using ALEX
— Access and view ENM command documentation using the Command Line Interface
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Documentation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 5-19
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
19
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
20
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM 19 Operations for
Radio Access Network
Using The ENM Network Explorer
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using The ENM Network Explorer | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 6-0
DISCLAIMER
This book is a training document and contains simplifications. Therefore, it must
not be considered as a specification of the system. The contents of this
document are subject to revision without notice due to ongoing progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any
error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
This document is not intended to replace the technical documentation that was
shipped with your system. Always refer to that technical documentation during
operation and maintenance.
© Ericsson AB 2019
This document was produced by Ericsson AB.
The book is to be used for training purposes only and it is strictly prohibited to
copy, reproduce, disclose or distribute it in any manner without the express
written consent from Ericsson.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
0
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Objectives
In this module you will learn to:
— Describe the features and functions of the Network Explorer application
— Launch the Network Explorer and access the application’s online help
— Describe the Network Explorer application layout
— Create and delete collections and saved searches
— Manage existing Collections and Saved Searches
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using The ENM Network Explorer | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 6-1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
1
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Network Explorer Overview
•
Network Explorer allows you to search through
managed objects using a flexible, user-friendly
search syntax
•
You can save collections of objects and search
queries to view them later
•
Other ENM applications can use the Collections,
Saved Searches or Network Explorer search results
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using The ENM Network Explorer | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 6-2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
2
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Network Explorer User Roles
User Role
Role Description
Network_Explorer_Administrator
Authorized for accessing network
explorer applications
Network_Explorer_Operator
Authorized for accessing network
explorer applications
User Roles can only assigned by the users with ENM User
Administration rights (SECURITY_ADMIN)
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using The ENM Network Explorer | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 6-3
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
3
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Launch ENM Network Explorer
•
•
To launch the Network Explorer, go to the Provisioning
category of the ENM Launcher
Click on “Network Explorer” to launch the ENM Network
Explorer.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using The ENM Network Explorer | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 6-4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
4
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Network Explorer Page Layout
Action Bar
Search Box
Collections
and Saved
Searches
Search Results
Managed
Object
Details
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using The ENM Network Explorer | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 6-5
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
5
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Access Network Explorer Application Help
To access the Network Explorer Application Help, Launch the Network Explorer
application.
• Expand the Help menu in the upper right corner of the page.
• Select “App Help”.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using The ENM Network Explorer | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 6-6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
6
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Saved Searches And Collections
— Collections are a fixed set of Managed Objects (MO)
— MOs can be added or removed manually from a collection
— MOs can be imported into a collection from a file
— Saved Searches are based on search criteria
—
If MOs are added or removed from the network the results of a
saved search will change
— Collections and Saved Searches can be Public or
Private
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using The ENM Network Explorer | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 6-7
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
7
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Example Collections
•
•
Nodes
• All Network nodes
• All Radio Access Nodes
• All Core nodes
• All Network nodes of a specific node type ( ERBS for example)
• All nodes in a market area
• All nodes in geographical area ( cities, states, regions)
• Special Event Nodes
• Nodes managed by individuals (Cell tech, RF engineer, Switch
tech)
• High Profile Nodes
Cells/Sectors
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using The ENM Network Explorer | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 6-8
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
8
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Search Box
— Network Explorer has an intuitive search syntax that is
designed to be easily read and is flexible regarding user
input.
— Network Explorer will return instances of all Managed
Objects matching the search criteria
— As you type, your query's syntax will be validated. If there
is an error in your syntax, the search button will be
disabled, and a warning icon will be displayed to the left of
the search field.
— You can see at which character there is an error by
hovering the cursor over the warning icon.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using The ENM Network Explorer | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 6-9
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
9
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create A New collection
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the Managed
Object(s) from the
Results List
Click “Add to Collection”
from the Action Bar
Select “Add to New
Collection”
Enter the collection name
Select Private or Public
Click on the “Add” button
1
3
2
4
5
6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using The ENM Network Explorer | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 6-10
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
10
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Collection Management
•
Click “View All” under “Collections” to open the Collections Management Page
•
Select a collection from the collection list to perform operations on the collection
•
Click the “View Contents” button on the Action Bar to view the objects included in the collection.
•
Click the “Add Objects from a file ” button on the Action Bar “ to add Objects to collection from a file .
•
Click the “Favorite” button on the Action Bar to make a collection a favorite.
•
Click the “Delete” button on the Action Bar to delete a collection
— Click the “Delete ” button on the Action Bar “ to delete a collection
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using The ENM Network Explorer | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 6-11
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
11
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Add Objects to a Collection from a File
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Create a text file with a list of object names – one object per line. Object names
must match names in ENM exactly.
Select a collection on the Collection Management page
Click “Add Object from a File”
Click on “Select file”
Select the import file from the file select dialog window and click on “Open”
Click “Add”
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using The ENM Network Explorer | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 6-12
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
12
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Collection Management Actions
Action Bar Button
Action
Create a Collection
Create a new collection
View Contents
Open Network Explorer to view contents of
the selected collection
Add Objects from File
Import objects from a file
Favourite
Make a collection a Favourite
Delete
Delete a collection
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using The ENM Network Explorer | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 6-13
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
13
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create A New Saved Search
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Enter a search query
into the Search Box
Click on Search
Click “Save Search”
from the Action Bar
Enter the Search
Name
Select Private or
Public
Click on “Save”
2
1
3
4
5
6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using The ENM Network Explorer | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 6-14
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
14
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Manage Saved Searches
— Click “View All” under Saved Searches to open the Saved Searches page
— Select a Saved Search to perform operations on a Saved Search
— Click “Execute Search” to list the objects included in the selected saved search
— Click on the “Delete” button to delete a Saved Search
— Click on the “Favorite” button to make a Saved Search a favorite.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using The ENM Network Explorer | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 6-15
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
15
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Filter Collections and Saved Searches
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Enter a name or a partial name
in the “Filter By Name” box to
filter the list of Collections or
Saved Searches
Click on “All” to show all both
Public and Private Collections or
Saved Searches
Click on “Public” to show all
public Collections or Saved
Searches
Click on “Private” to show all
private Collections or Saved
Searches
Click on “Favorites” to show
favorite public or private
Collections or Saved Searches
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using The ENM Network Explorer | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 6-16
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
16
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Change Public/Private Permissions On Collections
•
•
Private Collections and Searches can be changed from Private to Public
Users must own the collection or search to make permission changes
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using The ENM Network Explorer | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 6-17
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
17
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Network Explorer Criteria Builder
•
•
Criteria Builder allows you to
define/build criteria for searching
through nodes and managed objects
using a graphically represented criteria
tree.
In order to switch to Criteria Builder, click
on the "Switch to Criteria Builder" button
on the right side of the search box.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using The ENM Network Explorer | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 6-18
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
18
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Creating Complex Searches
3
1
2
5
4
6
7
8
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using The ENM Network Explorer | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 6-19
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
19
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Summary
In this module you have learned to:
— Describe the features and functions of the Network Explorer application
— Launch the Network Explorer and access the application’s online help
— Describe the Network Explorer application layout
— Create, modify and delete collections and saved searches
— Manage existing Collections and Saved Searches
— List the network nodes supported by ENM
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using The ENM Network Explorer | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 6-20
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
20
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
21
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM 19 Operations for
Radio Access Network
Using the ENM Network Viewer
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Viewer | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 7-0
DISCLAIMER
This book is a training document and contains simplifications. Therefore, it must
not be considered as a specification of the system. The contents of this
document are subject to revision without notice due to ongoing progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any
error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
This document is not intended to replace the technical documentation that was
shipped with your system. Always refer to that technical documentation during
operation and maintenance.
© Ericsson AB 2019
This document was produced by Ericsson AB.
The book is to be used for training purposes only and it is strictly prohibited to
copy, reproduce, disclose or distribute it in any manner without the express
written consent from Ericsson.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
0
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Objectives
In this module you will learn to:
— Describe the features and functions of the Network Viewer application.
— List and describe the Network Viewer application windows.
— Add Node: adds Network Elements to ENM.
— Set location: sets Network Element.
— Monitor Alarms: launches alarm monitor regarding Network Elements belonging to SubNetwork.
— Locate in Topology: launches Topology Browser application.
— Launch Node CLI: launches node CLI application.
— Delete Node: deletes Network Element from ENM.
— Search: allows to search and select the nodes from the network topology
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Viewer | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 7-1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
1
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Network Viewer
— Network Viewer provides access to
network resources through a
graphical representation of network
elements.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Viewer | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 7-2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
2
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Launch Network Viewer
› The user can launch the Network Viewer by clicking the “Network Viewer” link
under the “Monitoring” section of the ENM Launch page
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Viewer | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 7-3
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
3
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Network Viewer Layout
Action Bar
Map
Node Selection
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Viewer | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 7-4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
4
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Network Layer User Interface
— The network Tree is displayed on the left of the user
interface.
— The Network Tree consists of the following two
tabs:Network TabThe Network tab contains the
following two tabs:
— Topology: Used to select nodes and subnetworks
from the network topology
— Search: Used to search nodes on supported
managed object types
— Applied TabThe Applied tab is used to show the nodes
and subnetworks that are currently displayed on the
map
— Items selected in the network tree tabs are retained
when navigating among the tabs.
— The Topology Tab is the scoping panel default tab.
This tab is opened when Network Viewer is first
launched
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Viewer | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 7-5
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
5
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Search for Objects and Display on Map
The Search tab allows you to search for nodes
based on supported managed object types, or node
names and saved searches.
To search for nodes execute the following steps:
1.
2.
Click “Search” from the node selection
panel.
Enter search criteria
3.
4.
Click on the magnifier button.
The result will appear in the same box
5.
6.
Select the nodes to be shown on map
Click “apply” button
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Viewer | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 7-6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
6
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Network Map
— The Network map is displayed
on the right side of the user
interface based on the map
provider details
— The following operations can
be performed:
— Add Node.
— Delete Node
— Set location
— Monitor Alarms.
— Launch Element
— Launch Node CLI
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Viewer | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 7-7
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
7
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Alarm Summary on map
— The alarm summary state of a
Network element is represented
on the map based on its highest
severity using the below alarm
icons.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Viewer | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 7-8
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
8
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Right Click Operations
The following application can
be launched directly by right
click on node icon on map:
1. Set Location
2. Monitor Alarms
3. Locate in Topology
4. Delete Node
5. Launch Element
Manager
6. Launch Node CLI
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Viewer | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 7-9
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
9
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Single selection operation
The following applications
can be launched selecting
a single node on Topology
Tree
1. Add Node
2. Set Location
3. Monitor Alarm
4. Locate in Topology
5. Delete Node
6. Launch Element
Manager
7. Launch Node CLI
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Viewer | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 7-10
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
10
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Summary
In this module you have learned to:
— Describe the features and functions of the Network Viewer application.
— List and describe the Network Viewer application windows.
— Add Node: adds Network Elements to ENM.
— Set location: sets Network Element.
— Monitor Alarms: launches alarm monitor regarding Network Elements belonging to SubNetwork.
— Locate in Topology: launches Topology Browser application.
— Launch Node CLI: launches node CLI application.
— Delete Node: deletes Network Element from ENM.
— Search: allows to search and select the nodes from the network topology
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Viewer | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 7-11
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
11
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
12
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM 19 Operations for
Radio Access Network
ENM Node Tools
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Tools | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 8-0
DISCLAIMER
This book is a training document and contains simplifications. Therefore, it must
not be considered as a specification of the system. The contents of this
document are subject to revision without notice due to ongoing progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any
error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
This document is not intended to replace the technical documentation that was
shipped with your system. Always refer to that technical documentation during
operation and maintenance.
© Ericsson AB 2019
This document was produced by Ericsson AB.
The book is to be used for training purposes only and it is strictly prohibited to
copy, reproduce, disclose or distribute it in any manner without the express
written consent from Ericsson.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
0
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Objectives
In this module you will learn to:
— List the Node tools available in ENM
— Describe the features and functions of the node tools
— Access the following node tools from ENM:
— Advanced MO Scripting(AMOS)
— Element Manager
— Cabinet Viewer
— Node CLI
— WinFOIL CLI
— NWI-E CLI
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Tools | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 8-1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
1
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM Node Tools Overview
ENM provides the following tools to manage nodes for supported node types.
Tool
Description
Advanced MO Scripting (AMOS)
The MO Shell provides a powerful command line
interface towards network elements, with a wide
range of functionality including CM, PM and FM.
Element Manager
Node GUI for performing CM, FM, PM operations on a
node
Cabinet Viewer
Used for monitoring, locking/unlocking and resetting
hardware configurations on the cabinet of a node
Node CLI
Open the CLI of the selected network element in a
terminal emulator inside your browser.
WinFOIL CLI
The command line interface for executing command
towards BSC.
NWI-E CLI
CLI for performing Layer2/Layer3 configuration of
NWIE board in BSC
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Tools | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 8-2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
2
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Launching Node Tools Overview
Node tools can be launched several ways:
1. Click on a action button from the Action
Bar
2. Expand the “Actions” drop down list
from the Action bar and select the
action from the list
3. Right click on the selected node in the
results list and select the action from the
list
The actions available are based on the
specific node type selected and may not
appear if the user does not have rights to
perform the action
1
2
2
1
3
1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Tools | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 8-3
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
3
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Advanced MO Scripting(AMOS) features
AMOS provides the user the ability to manage the following functions for
supported nodes:
— Create, edit and delete a node’s configuration data
— Manage the node’s configuration versions
— View the active and historical alarms on the node
— Restart the node and it’s hardware components
— Lock and unlock the node’s hardware components and Managed
Objects
— Manage licenses and licensed features of node
— View the node’s software version information
— View and export node log files
Note: Not all the above features are supported for all node types
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Tools | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 8-4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
4
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM Supported RAN Nodes for AMOS
eNodeB DU Radio Node
RAN-LTE
eNodeB Pico Radio Node
RAN-LTE
Baseband Radio Node
RAN-LTE
5GRadio Node
RAN-5G
RNC
RAN-WCDMA
Node B Baseband Radio Node
RAN-WCDMA
eNodeB DU Radio Node
RAN-LTE
eNodeB Pico Radio Node
RAN-LTE
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Tools | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 8-5
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
5
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Accessing AMOS in ENM
1. Open Network Explorer
2. Locate a node using Network Explorer
search or from a Collection or Saved
Search
3. Select the node in the results list
4. Expand the Actions list from the Action
Bar and click on the “Launch AMOS” or
right click on the selected node in the
results list and select “Launch AMOS”
5. The AMOS terminal will opened in a
new window
6. After launching AMOS, standard AMOS
commands can be used.
AMOS can also be launched from:
• Alarm Monitor
• Node Monitor
• ENM Shell
Users must have the proper rights to access AMOS for the
“Launch AMOS” button to appear on the Action Bar
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Tools | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 8-6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
6
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
AMOS Access
— After launching AMOS
from Network Explorer,
standard AMOS
commands can be
used.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Tools | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 8-7
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
7
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
AMOS VM Resource Usage
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The CPU usage monitor displays the percentage CPU usage over all the processors in
the VM.
The Memory usage monitor displays the percentage of total Memory used in the VM.
The Sessions monitor displays the number of AMOS sessions running on the VM.
The CPU and Memory usage bar changes color with the current usage.
Green - low resource usage of less than 50%.
Orange - intermediate resource usage of less than 80%.
Red - high resource usage of greater than or equal to 80%.
The users can show or hide the resource usage in current running session by clicking the
> icon
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Tools | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 8-8
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
8
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Element Manager features
The Element Manager GUI provides the user the ability to manage the
following functions for supported nodes:
— Create, edit and delete a node’s configuration data
— Manage a node’s configuration versions (backups)
— View active and historical alarms on the node
— Restart a node and it’s hardware components
— Lock and unlock hardware components and Managed Objects(MOs)
— View and manage licensed features
— View a node’s software version information
— View and export node log files
Note: Not all the above features are supported for all node types
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Tools | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 8-9
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
9
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM Supported Nodes – Element Manager
Node
Type
eNodeB DU Radio Node
LTE-RAN
Node B Baseband Radio Node
WCDMA-RAN
RNC
WCDMA-RAN
MGW
Switch
MINI-LINK Indoor
Microwave
Fronthaul 6080
Switch
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Tools | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 8-10
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
10
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Access the Element Manager
1. Open Network Explorer
2. Locate a node using
Network Explorer search or
from a Collection or Saved
Search
3. Select the node in the results
list
4. Expand the Actions list from
the Action Bar and click on
the “Element Manager” or
right click on the selected
node in the results list and
select “Element Manager”
5. The Element Manager for
the selected node will be
opened in a new window
Users must have the proper rights to access the Element
Manager for the “Launch Element Manager ” button to appear
on the Action Bar
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Tools | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 8-11
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
11
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Cabinet Viewer Features
The Cabinet Viewer provides the user the ability to manage the following
functions for eNodeB DU Radio node.
— View the status of hardware components (locked/unlocked,
Enabled/Disabled)
— View active Alarms on the node
— Restart the node and hardware components
— Lock and unlock hardware components on the node
— Export node log files
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Tools | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 8-12
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
12
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Access the Cabinet Viewer
1. Open Network Explorer
2. Locate a node using
Network Explorer search or
from a Collection or Saved
Search
3. Select the node in the results
list
4. Expand the Actions list from
the Action Bar and click on
the “Cabinet Viewer” or right
click on the selected node in
the results list and select
“Cabinet Viewer”
5. The Cabinet Viewer for the
selected node will be opened
in a new window
Users must have the proper rights to access the Cabinet Viewer for
the “Launch Cabinet Viewer ” button to appear on the Action Bar
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Tools | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 8-13
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
13
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Node CLI Features
— Node CLI is an application to open the command line interface of a
selected node in a terminal emulator.
— ENM establishes a ssh connection to the node when the Node CLI is
launched.
— The user does not need to provide the IP address or login credentials
for the node.
— The user can debug, troubleshoot and configure the node without
having to install additional applications.
— Node CLI is called as WinFOIL CLI in BSC.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Tools | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 8-14
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
14
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Node CLI Supported Node Types
Node CLI Supported Node Types
MSRBS(LTE,WCDMA and GSM)
MINI-LINK Indoor, and Outdoor
RadioTNode
Switch-6391
Fronthaul 6080
EPG and VEPG
Router6672
WMG,vWMG
vCSCF
JUNIPER-MX
vSAPC
CISCO-ASR900
vMTAS
CISCO-ASR9000
vSBG
BSP,
IPWorks and vIPWorks
DSC, vDSC
vBGF
BSC
MRF,vMRF
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Tools | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 8-15
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
15
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Launch Node CLI
1. Open the Network Explorer
2. Locate a node using the Network
Explorer search or from a Collection or
Saved Search
3. Select a node in the results list
4. Click on the “Launch Element Manager”
button from the Action Bar or right click
on the selected node in the results list
and select “Launch Element Manager”.
5. The Node CLI terminal window be will
opened in a new window.
Refer to the ENM Node CLI online help for
additional information on using the Node
CLI for specific node types.
Users must have the proper rights to access the Node CLI for the
“Launch Node CLI” button to appear on the Action Bar
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Tools | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 8-16
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
16
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
WinFOIL CLI Features
— The WinFOIL CLI is a command line interface for executing commands
toward BSC
— ENM establishes a ssh connection to the node when the WinFOIL CLI is
launched.
— The user does not need to provide the IP address or login credentials for the
node.
— WinFIOL CLI can be launched in two different ways, directly without
connecting to any Network Element and by selecting a Network Element,
open the context menu and select "Launch WinFIOL CLI"
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Tools | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 8-17
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
17
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM Supported Nodes – WinFOIL CLI
WinFOIL CLI Supported Node Types
BSC
vIP-STP
HLR-FE-BSP
vMSC
HLR-FE-IS
MSC-DB-BSP
HLR-FE
MSC-DB
IP-STP-BSP
vHLR-FE
IP-STP
MSC-BC-BSP
MSC-BC-IS
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Tools | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 8-18
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
18
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Launch WinFOIL CLI
1. Open the Network Explorer
2. Locate a node using the
Network Explorer search or
from a Collection or Saved
Search
3. Select a node in the results list
4. Click on the “Launch Element
Manager” button from the
Action Bar or right click on the
selected node in the results list
and select “Launch WinFOIL
CLI”.
5. The WinFOIL CLI terminal
window be will opened in a new
window.
WinFOIL CLI is command line
interface for BSC.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Tools | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 8-19
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
19
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
NWI-E CLI Features
— NWI-E Node is associated and configured as a part of BSC Node Type in
ENM
— NWI-E is L2/L3 switch in BSC
— From Network Explorer or Topology Browser, select the BSC Node and open
Node CLI connections towards NWI-E
— Command line interface for performing Layer2/Layer3 configuration of
NWIE board in BSC
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Tools | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 8-20
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
20
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
NWI-E Access – BSC
— After launching AMOS
from Network Explorer,
standard AMOS
commands can be
used.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Tools | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 8-21
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
21
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Summary
In this module you have learned to:
— List the Node tools available in ENM
— Describe the features and functions of the node tools
— Access the following node tools from ENM:
— Advanced MO Scripting(AMOS)
— Element Manager
— Cabinet Viewer
— Node CLI
— WinFOIL CLI
— NWI-E CLI
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Tools | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 8-22
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
22
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
23
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM 19 Operations for
Radio Access Network
Using the ENM Topology Browser
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Topology Browser | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 9-0
DISCLAIMER
This book is a training document and contains simplifications. Therefore, it must
not be considered as a specification of the system. The contents of this
document are subject to revision without notice due to ongoing progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any
error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
This document is not intended to replace the technical documentation that was
shipped with your system. Always refer to that technical documentation during
operation and maintenance.
© Ericsson AB 2019
This document was produced by Ericsson AB.
The book is to be used for training purposes only and it is strictly prohibited to
copy, reproduce, disclose or distribute it in any manner without the express
written consent from Ericsson.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
0
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Objectives
In this module you will learn to:
— Describe the features and functions of the Topology Browser application.
— List and describe the Topology Browser application windows.
— View the Object Model of a selected node
— View and Edit Managed Object Attributes.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Topology Browser | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 9-1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
1
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Topology Browser Overview
The Topology Browser allows the user to:
— Navigate through the model structure of a
selected node
— View the nodes configuration synchronization
status
— View the instance data of a selected object
— Edit the instance data of a selected object if
the user has proper authority
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Topology Browser | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 9-2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
2
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Topology Browser Required User Roles
To use Topology Browser, users must have a user account with one of the following
roles:
•
•
Topology_Browser_Operator
Topology_Browser_Administrator
•
Custom role with Topology Browser capabilities
• Resource: rootAssociations, Operation: read
• Resource: persistentobjectservice, Operation: read
• Resource: persistentobjectservice, Operation: update
• Resource: modelInformationService, Operation: read
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Topology Browser | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 9-3
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
3
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Launch Topology Browser
•
•
To launch the Topology Browser , go to the Provisioning
category of the ENM Launcher.
Click on “Topology Browser” to launch the Topology Browser.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Topology Browser | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 9-4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
4
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Topology Browser Page Layout
Action Bar
Managed
Object
Details
Topology
Tree
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Topology Browser | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 9-5
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
5
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Access Topology Browser Application Help
• To access the Topology Browser Application Help, launch the Topology
Browser application.
• Expand the Help menu in the upper right corner of the page.
• Select “App Help”.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Topology Browser | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 9-6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
6
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Topology Tree
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Topology Browser tree view displays the
SubNetworks at the top level.
Under 'All other nodes' are managed objects
which are not classified under a SubNetwork,
including for example Managed Elements and
MeContext.
The FDN Path indicates Fully Distinguished
Name (FDN) of the currently selected
Managed Object.
The FDN path can be edited.
The FDN Path is not a search function, only a
correctly formatted FDN can be entered.
The path can be selected and copied to other
applications, such as the ENM CLI application.
The Topology Tree displays the Managed
Objects which can be expanded through
multiple levels to select the desired object.
FDN Path
Topology
Tree
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Topology Browser | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 9-7
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
7
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Node Configuration Sync Status
•
•
•
•
The arrows icon on
right side of the Node
name indicates the
nodes configuration
sync status
The red “x” indicates
the node is unsynchronized
When a node is unsynchronized the
nodes attribute data
may not match the
data in the live
network.
The Node Details tab
in Detail window also
shows the node sync
status
Node Configuration is un-synchronized
Node Configuration is synchronized
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Topology Browser | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 9-8
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
8
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Search for Objects
To locate Managed Objects in the Topology Browser:
1. Click the “Search for an Object” button from the action bar This will
launch the Network Explorer
2. Search for the desired object in Network Explorer
3. Click the check box next to the desired object
4. Click the “Return Selected Managed Object” button.
5. The object will be expanded in the Topology Browser
6. The object attributes will be visible in the Attributes area
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Topology Browser | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 9-9
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
9
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
View MO Attributes
Topology
Tree
Managed
Object
Details
To view a Managed Object’s attributes:
• Select the Managed Object in the topology tree
• If Details area is not shown, click on the Information icon
• The selected objects attribute details will be visible in right side of the page
• The node’s synchronization state and O&M IP address are shown in the Node
Details tab
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Topology Browser | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 9-10
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
10
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Node Attribute Types
Two types of Attributes are
available in the Topology
Browser:
•
•
Persistent Attributes are
attributes that are
synchronized with node
Non-persistent
attributes are attributes
that are retrieved directly
from the node
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Topology Browser | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 9-11
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
11
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Locate, Filter and View Object
Attributes Details
1.
2.
Select an MO
from the
Topology Tree
Enter all or the
starting
characters of an
attribute name in
the filter box to
locate an
attribute in the
list of attributes
1
2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Topology Browser | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 9-12
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
12
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
View MO Parameter Description
To view a
description of the
attribute, click the ‘i”
icon on the right
side of the attribute
name to get a
description of the
attribute
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Topology Browser | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 9-13
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
13
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Edit Object Attributes
To edit an object’s attributes:
1.
Select and Change the
attribute value
2.
A change bar will appear
by the attribute.
3.
Click “Save Changes”
4.
Changes can not be saved
if the value is out of range,
A message by the value will
indicate the reason.
3
2
1
If the user does not have the
authority to make changes, a
pop-up window will inform the
user that they are unauthorized
to make changes.
4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Topology Browser | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 9-14
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
14
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Attribute Save Changes and Confirm Save
1. To save the attribute changes, click on the “Save Changes” button.
2. The Confirm Save dialog window will open.
3. Expand the Changes to view the current value and proposed changes for attributes that
were modified.
4. To make the changes, Click on the “Save Changes” button.
5. The changes will be made immediately in the live network.
6. If node is un-synchronized, a message will appear indicate to that changes can not be
saved.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Topology Browser | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 9-15
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
15
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Performing Actions in Selected Managed Objects
•
•
•
•
After selecting an object in the Topology Tree,
the actions available for the selected object will
appear in the action bar.
Additional actions may be available under the
“Actions” dropdown list.
The actions can also be clicking on the object in
the accessed by right Topology Tree
The actions available will depend on the type of
the object selected.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Topology Browser | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 9-16
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
16
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Summary
In this module you have learned to:
— Describe the features and functions of the Topology Browser application.
— List and describe the Topology Browser application windows.
— View the Object Model of a selected node
— View and Edit Managed Object Attributes
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Topology Browser | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 9-17
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
17
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
18
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM 19 Operations for
Radio Access Network
Using ENM Log Viewer Application
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using ENM Log Viewer Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 10-0
DISCLAIMER
This book is a training document and contains simplifications. Therefore, it must
not be considered as a specification of the system. The contents of this
document are subject to revision without notice due to ongoing progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any
error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
This document is not intended to replace the technical documentation that was
shipped with your system. Always refer to that technical documentation during
operation and maintenance.
© Ericsson AB 2019
This document was produced by Ericsson AB.
The book is to be used for training purposes only and it is strictly prohibited to
copy, reproduce, disclose or distribute it in any manner without the express
written consent from Ericsson.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
0
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Objectives
In this module you will learn to:
— Describe features and functions of the ENM Log Viewer application.
— Launch the Log Viewer and use the application’s online help.
— Describe the layout of Log Viewer application.
— Use the Log Viewer to search the ENM logs and view the log details.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using ENM Log Viewer Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 10-1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
1
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM Log Viewer Overview
— ENM logs events and errors from the EMM system that can be
helpful in troubleshooting ENM and network issues.
— The Log Viewer provides a browser based interface to query
and view details of the ENM logs.
— The application allows for full text searching and complex
filtering of the ENM logs
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using ENM Log Viewer Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 10-2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
2
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Launch ENM Log Viewer
— The Log Viewer application link is located in the “System” category
of the ENM Application Launcher page.
— The Log Viewer is launched by clicking the “Log Viewer” link
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using ENM Log Viewer Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 10-3
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
3
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Log Viewer Help
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using ENM Log Viewer Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 10-4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
4
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Log Viewer Application Page Layout
Action Bar
Search Criteria
Results
Details
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using ENM Log Viewer Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 10-5
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
5
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Log Viewer Log Details
Click on log entry to view the log details for the selected entry
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using ENM Log Viewer Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 10-6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
6
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Log Viewer Date/Time Filter
Use the "Start Date/Time " and "End Date/Time " fields to
specify date/time range for the search.
1.
By default ,"Start time" will be set to four hours
previous to the time Log Viewer was loaded.
2.
Clicking in start or end time area will open the
date/time picker
3.
Click on the search icon
4.
To search for logs between two date/times, enter the
start date/time and the end date/time.
5.
Only setting "Start Date/Time will result in returning
all log entries from the specified start date/time
6.
Only setting "End Date/Time ", will return all logs up to
and including the specified end date/time.
7.
To search all logs, clear the "Start Date/Time " and
"End Date/Time " fields by clicking on the “X” next to
the date/times
to perform the search.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using ENM Log Viewer Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 10-7
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
7
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Log Viewer Search Box
1.
2.
Use the Search Box to find any word in any
field of any log.
Enter the word into the field labelled "Enter
Search Criteria" and click the search button or
press enter.
3.
Complex searches with multiple words and
conditions can also be used.
4.
See Log Viewer Online Help for syntax and
examples.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using ENM Log Viewer Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 10-8
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
8
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Wildcards And Phases
Operator
Question Mark
?
Asterisk
*
Example
Message Result
eNB4-32?
All messages containing
“eNB4-32” where the last
character is any
character
eNB*
All messages staring with
“eNB” and ends in any
other character or
characters
*NB*
All messages containing
“NB”
Phases: Words wrapped by quotation marks are searched for the exact set of
words. The words in log entries must match the phrase exactly. For example
"license expired", returns all log entries with the phrase "license expired", but not
"license is expired".
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using ENM Log Viewer Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 10-9
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
9
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Search Operators
Search terms can combined logically using Boolean operators. Boolean
operators MUST appear in capital letters.
Multiple operators can be used in a single search term
Operator
Message Result
AND
"AMOS.COMMAND" AND "lt all"
Messages containing both the phases
"AMOS.COMMAND" and "lt all"
OR
"AMOS.COMMAND" AND ( "= st" OR "= lt")
Messages containing both the phase
"AMOS.COMMAND" and the phases "=
st" or "= lt")
Not
"AMOS.COMMAND" NOT "= st"
Messages containing the phase
"AMOS.COMMAND" and not the phase
"= st
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using ENM Log Viewer Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 10-10
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
10
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Log Viewer Log Results
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The results of a search query are listed sequentially with the
most recent log entry appearing first in the table.
Up to 50 logs are listed on each page.
All timestamps are displayed using the time zone where the
ENM server is located. This may be different from your local
time zone.
Click any log entry row to view all recorded details of the
event or error in the details pane.
Use the “Export” button on the action bar to export the logs.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using ENM Log Viewer Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 10-11
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
11
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Summary
In this module you have learned to:
— Describe features and functions of the ENM Log Viewer application.
— Launch the Log Viewer and use the application’s online help.
— Describe the layout of Log Viewer application.
— Use the Log Viewer to search the ENM logs and view the log details.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using ENM Log Viewer Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 10-12
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
12
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
13
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM 19 Operations for
Radio Access Network
Using the ENM Alarm Monitor
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Monitor | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 12-0
DISCLAIMER
This book is a training document and contains simplifications. Therefore, it must
not be considered as a specification of the system. The contents of this
document are subject to revision without notice due to ongoing progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any
error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
This document is not intended to replace the technical documentation that was
shipped with your system. Always refer to that technical documentation during
operation and maintenance.
© Ericsson AB 2019
This document was produced by Ericsson AB.
The book is to be used for training purposes only and it is strictly prohibited to
copy, reproduce, disclose or distribute it in any manner without the express
written consent from Ericsson.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
0
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Objectives
In this module you will learn to:
— Describe features and functions of the Alarm Monitor application
— Launch the Alarm Monitor and access the application’s online help
— Describe and configure the Alarm Monitor application layout
— Use the Alarm Monitor filtering function to view selected alarms
— View alarm details, acknowledge / un-acknowledge and export alarms
— Enable/Disable Alarm Supervision and Initiate Alarm Synchronization.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Monitor | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 12-1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
1
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Alarm Monitor Overview
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Displays all the open alarms present in
ENM database
View alarm details
Export alarms
Acknowledge/Un-acknowledge alarms
Adds comments to alarms
Enables / disables alarm supervision
Synchronizes alarms
Filters alarm information
Replaces OSS - RC Alarm List Viewer
(ALV)
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Monitor | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 12-2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
2
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Alarm Monitor Supported Nodes
Alarms are monitored for the following network objects:
•
•
All Network Elements
ENM Management System
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Monitor | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 12-3
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
3
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Alarm Monitor User Roles
User Role
FM_Administrator
Role Description
• Perform Acknowledge and Unacknowledge
operations on open alarms
• Enable/Disable Supervision on Network Elements
and to Initiate Alarm Synchronization
•
FM_Operator
Perform Acknowledge and Unacknowledge
operations on open alarms
User Roles can only assigned by the users with ENM User
Administration rights (SECURITY_ADMIN)
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Monitor | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 12-4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
4
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Launch Alarm Monitor
1. The Alarm Monitor application link is located in the Monitoring
category on the ENM Application Launcher Page.
2. Select the “Alarm Monitor” link to launch the application.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Monitor | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 12-5
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
5
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Alarm Monitor Page Layout
Action Bar
Topology
Tree
Alarm Table
Alarm
Summary
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Monitor | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 12-6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
6
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Access Alarm Monitor Application Help
• To access the Alarm
Monitor Application Help,
launch the Alarm Monitor
application.
• Expand the Help menu in
the upper right corner of
the page.
• Select “App Help”.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Monitor | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 12-7
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
7
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Add Network Topology
1. Browse Topology
2. Search Topology
3. Collections
4. Saved searches
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Monitor | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 12-8
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
8
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Alarm List
›
The alarm list shows all open alarms for the selected nodes
›
The list is automatically updated when new alarms are received.
›
Unacknowledged alarms are shown in bold font.
›
Acknowledged alarms are shown in normal font.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Monitor | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 12-9
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
9
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Alarm Attribute Descriptions (1 of 2)
Alarm Attribute
Repeat Count
Alarm Attribute Description
Number of times a similar alarm is received from node and correlated to the
existing alarm.
Severity
Criticality of alarm reported by the node.
Network Element
Network Element which reported the alarm.
Alarming Object
Specific object which reported the alarm.
Object of Reference
Fully qualified name of object which reported the alarm
Insert Time
Time at which alarm is inserted in the ENM database.
Event Time
Time at which alarm is generated on the node.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Monitor | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 12-10
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
10
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Alarm Attribute Descriptions (2 of 2)
Alarm Attribute
Alarm Attribute Description
Specific Problem
Actual problem reported in the alarm. Used to lookup alarm procedures in
Node Alex.
Probable Cause
Probable root cause of the alarm.
Event Type
Type of alarm of the reporting alarm
Alarm State
State of alarm which represents whether it is active or acknowledged or
cleared.
Ack Operator
Operator who acknowledged the alarm.
Ack Time
Time at which alarm is acknowledged.
Alarm Number
Unique alarm number generated by the node, which can be used to
perform alarm correlation.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Monitor | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 12-11
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
11
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
View Alarms for Single Node
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click on the
“Remove All
Applied.” button
Enter Node Name
in the Find box and
click on the “Find.”
button
Select the node in
the list. The Node
will be highlighted
in blue.
Click on the “Apply”
button
Alarms for will be
shown for the
selected node
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Monitor | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 12-12
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
12
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
View Alarms for Multiple Nodes
To select multiple
nodes in the topology
list , use the following
keyboard shortcuts:
›
–
Use CTRL+Click to select
the nodes
–
Use SHIFT+Click to select
all nodes between two
selections.
–
Click on the “Apply”
button
›
Alarms will be shown
for the nodes in
Topology List
›
To remove the
selected Nodes, click
on “Remove All
Applied” button
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Monitor | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 12-13
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
13
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Configure Alarm Monitor Table Settings
Some of the attributes are selected by default.
The table settings option configures the columns
according to user preference
›
Select attributes to be shown. Unselect
attributes to hide
›
To change column order drag the attribute up
or down list
›
Click on push pin icon to freeze a column on
left side of alarm list
›
After selecting preferred settings, click
“Apply” to save the table settings for the
current alarm list view
›
If the row coloring setting is on, the severity
color will be shown across the entire row. If it
is off, a severity color bar will be shown on
the left hand side of table
›
The table setting will be saved for the
current workspace
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Monitor | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 12-14
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
14
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Manage Workspaces
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Open the Workspace
Menu from the Action
Bar.
Select “New” to create a
new workspace.
Configure the topology
and table settings.
Select “Rename” to
rename a workspace.
Select “Open” to open a
workspace – Workspaces
can be opened in a new
tab.
Workspaces can be
deleted using the
trashcan icon in the Open
Workspaces menu
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Monitor | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 12-15
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
15
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Application Settings
› Alarm Monitor configuration settings
are saved automatically per user.
› The settings include Topology and
Table configurations
› The changes are shown if the same
user logs in again or reopens the
application.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Monitor | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 12-16
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
16
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
View Alarm Summary
To filter alarms, select the “Filter” icon.
1. Select an alarm from the alarm list
2. Select the “View Summary” Button from the
Action Bar.
OR
3. Right click on the alarm and select “View
Summary”
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Monitor | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 12-17
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
17
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Alarm Details
To view the
alarm
details
click on
“View All
Details” in
the Alarm
Summary
window
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Monitor | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 12-18
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
18
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Alarm Severity Filtering
Critical
•
•
•
•
Major
Minor
Warning
Indeterminate
Cleared
Alarm filtering can be done on the alarm list based on the alarm severity.
ENM inherits the severities from the nodes.
Select the severities to filter the alarm table by the selected severities
Severity counts shown are the count of the alarms on the applied nodes
and are updated for every 10 seconds.
If no severities are selected all severities are shown in the alarm table
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Monitor | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 12-19
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
19
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Alarm Record Type Filtering
The Alarm Table can be filtered based on the category the following categories.
Category
Application Launch Details
All
Displays all alarms
Alarms
Displays alarms having the record types:
ALARM,REPEATED_ALARM,NON_SYNCHABLE_ALARM,CLEAR_LIST,REP
EATED_NON_SYNCHABLE,UPDATE,NODE_SUSPENDED,HB_FAILURE_N
O_SYNCH,
ALARM_SUPPRESSED_ALARM,OUT_OF_SYNC,CLEARALL,OSCILLATORY
_HB_ALARM,TECHNICIAN_PRESENT,UNKNOWN_RECORD_TYPE,HEART
BEAT_ALARM,
SYNCHRONIZATION_ALARM,SYNCHRONIZATION_STARTED,SYNCHRON
IZATION_ENDED,SYNC_NETWORK.
Alerts
Displays alerts having record type :
REPEATED_ERROR_MESSAGE,ERROR_MESSAGE,SYNCHRONIZATION_A
BORTED,SYNCHRONIZATION_IGNORED.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Monitor | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 12-20
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
20
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Filter Alarms
1. Select the “Filter” icon from
the action bar to open the
Filters dialog
2. To filter by alarm severities,
select the alarm severities
to filter.
3. To filter by alarm attributes,
select an attribute from
“Add a Alarm Attribute”.
Select the operator and the
attribute value to filter
4. Click the “Apply” button to
save the filter settings
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Monitor | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 12-21
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
21
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Export Alarms
›
Users can export selected
alarms to their browser
›
Alarms will be exported in
the Comma Separated
Variable (CSV ) format
To Export Alarms:
›
Select one alarm or more
alarms
›
Click the “Export.” Button
from the action bar or right
click on the alarm and
select “Export”
›
A message indicating the
export is being generated
will open in a new tab
›
If Excel is installed on the
users computer, the user
will get a prompt to open
the file in Excel.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Monitor | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 12-22
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
22
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
View Alarm Troubleshooting Documentation
›
Alarm Troubleshooting
Documentation can be accessed in
the Alarm Monitor using the
Operational Procedure Information
(OPI) documents in Alex for selected
alarm.
›
For the OPI to function properly, the
Alex Library version for the node
reporting the alarm must be installed
on ENM and the OPI Mapping must
be configured by the ENM system
administrator.
To view the OPI for a selected alarm:
›
Select an alarm
›
Select the “View OPI” Button from the
Action Bar or right click on the alarm
and select “View OPI”
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Monitor | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 12-23
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
23
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Acknowledge Alarms
• Alarms can be acknowledged
from the Alarm Monitor
• The user must have proper
rights to acknowledge alarms.
• To acknowledge alarms:
• Select one or more alarms
• Select the “Acknowledge”
Button from the Action Bar.
OR
• Right click on the alarm and
select “Acknowledge”
• The time and date of the
acknowledge and username of
acknowledger will be saved
• When cleared alarms are
acknowledged they will be
removed from the alarm list
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Monitor | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 12-24
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
24
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Un-Acknowledge Alarms
• Alarms can be unacknowledged
from the Alarm Monitor. The
alarm must be acknowledged to
unacknowledged it.
• The user must have proper rights
to un-acknowledge alarms.
• To un-acknowledge alarms:
• Select one or more alarms
from the alarm list
• Select the “Unacknowledge”
Button from the Action Bar.
OR
• Right click on the alarm and
select “Unacknowledge”
• After unacknowledging an alarm
the Ack attribute will show the
Bell Icon.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Monitor | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 12-25
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
25
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Add Alarm Comments
›
Users can add comments
on any selected alarm in
the alarm list.
To add a comment:
›
Select the alarm the in
alarm list
›
Click the “Add Comment.”
button from the action bar
or right click on the alarm
and select “Add Comment”
›
Enter the comment text
and click on the “Add
Comment” button
›
The time and date and the
username will be saved
with the comment
›
Multiple comments can be
added to an alarm
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Monitor | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 12-26
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
26
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Alarm Monitor -Monitor Related Alarms
— An alarm correlation UUID is generated on a node when a primary alarm is raised. The same
correlation UUID is included in any secondary alarms that are raised as a result of the primary alarm.
Because of this, alarms that have the same root cause can be correlated based on having a common
alarm correlation UUID.
— Related alarms have a root attribute as primary or secondary.
— A primary alarm has one alarm correlation UUID and it can have multiple secondary alarms.
— A secondary alarm can have one or two alarm correlation UUID(s) so it can be related to one or two
primary alarms.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Monitor | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 12-27
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
27
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Monitor Related Alarms
1.
2.
3.
Select the Required Related Alarm from the alarm
table
The Monitor Related Alarms button will appear on
the action bar
A new tab with an Alarms table, containing the
selected alarm and all related alarms will be
displayed.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Monitor | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 12-28
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
28
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Monitor Related Alarms – Select Alarm With
Related Alarms
— If an alarm in the alarm table has related alarms, the Monitor Related Alarms button will appears on
the action bar when the alarm is selected.
— To view the related alarms, click on the Monitor Related Alarms Button
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Monitor | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 12-29
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
29
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Monitor Related Alarms – Related Alarms List
— A new Alarm Monitor window will open with the list of related alarms.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Monitor | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 12-30
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
30
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Launch Other Applications
Application
Application Launch Details
AMOS
Launched from Go To menu and Alarm Details page for nodes supporting
AMOS
Element Manager
Launched from action bar or right click on alarm for nodes supporting
Element manager
Node CLI
Network Element which reported the alarm.
Alarm Search
Launched from Go To menu and Alarm Details page
Topology Browser
Launched from Go To menu and Alarm Details page
Users must have the ENM user proper roles to use AMOS, Element Manager and
Node CLI applications
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Monitor | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 12-31
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
31
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Enable and Disable Node Alarm Supervision
— Alarm Supervision can be
enabled and disabled from
the Alarm Monitor
— Disabling Alarm Supervision
on a node prevents ENM
from storing incoming
alarms from the Node.
— Users must have proper
rights to enable or disable
alarm supervision
— To Enable or Disable Alarm
Supervision Right click on
the node in Topology list and
select “Enable Supervision”
or “Disable Supervision”
— A Message will appear
above the Action Bar
indicating operation was
successful
Enable and Disable Node
Alarm Supervision
operations will only be
available if the user has the
FM_Administrator
role
Warning: Disabling Alarm
Supervision will prevent
any alarms from being
saved in ENM
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Monitor | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 12-32
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
32
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Initiate Alarm Synchronization
•
•
Alarm Synchronization ensures that the
open alarm list on ENM matches the
alarm list in the nodes.
To initiate Alarm Synchronization
• Right click on the node in the
Topology list and select “Initiate
Alarm Synchronization”
• A message will appear above the
Action Bar indicating operation
was successful
The Alarm Synchronization operation will only be available if the user has the
FM_Administrator role
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Monitor | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 12-33
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
33
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Summary
In this module you have learned to:
— Describe features and functions of the Alarm Monitor application
— Launch the Alarm Monitor and access the application’s online help
— Describe and configure the Alarm Monitor application layout
— Use the Alarm Monitor filtering function to view selected alarms
— View alarm details, acknowledge / un-acknowledge and export alarms
— Enable/Disable Alarm Supervision and Initiate Alarm Synchronization.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Monitor | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 12-34
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
34
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
35
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM 19 Operations for
Radio Access Network
Using the ENM Alarm Overview Application
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Overview Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 13-0
DISCLAIMER
This book is a training document and contains simplifications. Therefore, it must
not be considered as a specification of the system. The contents of this
document are subject to revision without notice due to ongoing progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any
error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
This document is not intended to replace the technical documentation that was
shipped with your system. Always refer to that technical documentation during
operation and maintenance.
© Ericsson AB 2019
This document was produced by Ericsson AB.
The book is to be used for training purposes only and it is strictly prohibited to
copy, reproduce, disclose or distribute it in any manner without the express
written consent from Ericsson.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
0
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Objectives
In this module you will learn to:
— Describe features and functions of the Alarm Overview application.
— Launch the Alarm Overview and access the application’s online help.
— Describe and configure the Alarm Overview application widgets.
— Use the Alarm Overview application to monitor the network faults in a dashboard view.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Overview Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 13-1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
1
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Alarm Overview Feature
•
•
Provides widgets to monitor the
following summarized alarm
information:
• Most Problematic Node by Alarm
Count
• Alarm Severity Summary
• Most Problematic Alarm Type By
Count
• Alarm Type Summary
Changes in this summarized data will be
updated in all widgets every two
minutes.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Overview Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 13-2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
2
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Launch Alarm Overview
1. The Alarm Overview application link is located in the Monitoring
category on the ENM Application Launcher Page
2. Select the “Alarm Overview” link to launch the application
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Overview Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 13-3
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
3
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Alarm Overview Page Layout
Action Bar
Topology
Tree
Application
Widgets
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Overview Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 13-4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
4
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Access Alarm Overview Application Help
• To access the Alarm
Overview Application
Help, launch the Alarm
Overview application.
• Expand the Help menu in
the upper right corner of
the page.
• Select “App Help”.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Overview Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 13-5
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
5
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Alarm Overview Setup
1. Add network
objects.
2. Add widgets.
3. Customize
the
application
layout.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Overview Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 13-6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
6
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Add Network Topology
1. Browse Topology
2. Search Topology
3. Collections
4. Saved searches
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Overview Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 13-7
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
7
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Add a Widget
1.Click “Add a
Widget.” on the
action bar
2.Expand the
“Select a Widget”
dropdown list
3.Select a Widget
4.Click “Save.”
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Overview Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 13-8
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
8
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Most Problematic Node By Alarm Count Widget
› This displays the top-most problematic nodes in
descending order based on the alarm count of selected
nodes.
› Double click on the a row to launch the Alarm Monitor to
show alarm details.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Overview Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 13-9
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
9
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Most Problematic Node By Alarm Count Widget
Settings
To configure number of
nodes to be displayed
in Most Problematic
Node By Alarm Count
widget
› Click on the settings
icon
› Select the number of
nodes from the dropdown list.
› Click on the “Save.”
button
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Overview Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 13-10
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
10
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Alarm Severity Summary
› Displays a visual indication of the number of alarms for each severity
type based current alarms for the nodes selected in Network
Topology list
› Click on the a bar in the chart to launch the Alarm Monitor to show
alarm details for the selected severity
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Overview Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 13-11
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
11
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Alarm Severity Summary – Widget Settings
To configure the
severity types to be
displayed in the Alarm
Severity Summary:
› Click on the settings
icon to show the
"Widget Setting
› Select the severity
types to show by
checking the check
boxes.
› Click on the “Save”
Button
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Overview Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 13-12
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
12
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Most Problematic Alarm Type By Count
› Displays the top most problematic alarm types in
descending order based on the alarm type of the selected
nodes.
› Click on the a row to launch the Alarm Monitor to show
alarm details.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Overview Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 13-13
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
13
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Most Problematic Alarm Type By Count –
Widget Settings
To select the number of
nodes to be displayed in
the Most Problematic
Alarm Type By Count
widget:
› Click on the settings
icon
› The "Widget Setting.“
will be displayed
› Select the number of
nodes from the dropdown list
› Click on “Save”.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Overview Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 13-14
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
14
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Alarm Type Summary
› The Alarm Type Summary widget is a graphical representation of
the number of alarms for configured alarm types for the selected
nodes.
› The widget can be configured to view up to 10 alarm types per
widget.
› Click on a bar in the chart to launch the Alarm Monitor to show alarm
details.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Overview Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 13-15
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
15
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Alarm Type Summary – Widget Settings
› Click on the settings icon
› Select the Alarm Types to be included
in the widget by clicking on a type.
› Selected types will be highlighted in
blue.
› Use ctl + Click or shift + Click to select
multiple types.
› Enter a type and click “Find” locate a
type.
› Enter a type and click “Add” to add a
type.
› Click “Save” to save the selected
types.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Overview Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 13-16
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
16
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Summary
In this module you have learned to:
— Describe features and functions of the Alarm Overview application.
— Launch the Alarm Overview and access the application’s online help.
— Describe and configure the Alarm Overview application widgets.
— Use the Alarm Overview application to monitor the network faults in a dashboard view.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Overview Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 13-17
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
17
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
18
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM 19 Operations for
Radio Access Network
Using the ENM Alarm Search Application
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Search Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 14-0
DISCLAIMER
This book is a training document and contains simplifications. Therefore, it must
not be considered as a specification of the system. The contents of this
document are subject to revision without notice due to ongoing progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any
error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
This document is not intended to replace the technical documentation that was
shipped with your system. Always refer to that technical documentation during
operation and maintenance.
© Ericsson AB 2019
This document was produced by Ericsson AB.
The book is to be used for training purposes only and it is strictly prohibited to
copy, reproduce, disclose or distribute it in any manner without the express
written consent from Ericsson.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
0
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Objectives
In this module you will learn to:
— Describe features and functions of the ENM Alarm Search application.
— Launch the Alarm Search and access the application’s online help.
— Describe Alarm Search application layout.
— Configure the Alarm Search criteria.
— View and export the Alarm Search results.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Search Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 14-1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
1
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Alarm Search Overview
Provides the following alarm searching criteria:
• Alarm Type: The user can search open alarms
or historical alarms.
• Date/Time: The search only displays the
alarms for the specified date/time criteria.
• Alarm Attributes: The search only displays the
alarms matching the specified alarm
attributes.
• Node List: The search the only displays alarms
for the selected nodes.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Search Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 14-2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
2
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Alarm Search User Roles
User Role
Role Description
FM_Administrator
Allows query for historical and
open alarms
FM_Operator
Allows query for historical and
open alarms
User Roles can only assigned by the users with ENM User
Administration rights (SECURITY_ADMIN)
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Search Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 14-3
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
3
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Supported Nodes
Alarms can be searched for the following network
objects:
•
•
All Network Elements defined in ENM
ENM Management System
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Search Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 14-4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
4
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Launch Alarm Search
— The Alarm Search application link is located in “Monitoring” category
on the ENM Application Launcher page
— Select the “Alarm Search” link to launch the application
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Search Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 14-5
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
5
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Alarm Search Page Layout
Action Bar
Search
Criteria
Topology
Tree
Results
Table
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Search Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 14-6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
6
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Access Alarm Search Application Help
• To access the Alarm Search
Application Help, launch
the Alarm Search
application.
• Expand the Help menu in
the upper right corner of
the page.
• Select “App Help”.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Search Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 14-7
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
7
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Alarm Search Types
Alarm data can be filtered and searched based on the type of the alarm.
—Open Alarm: All active and cleared alarms that are yet to be
acknowledged by the operator are termed as Open Alarms.
—History Alarm: All spontaneous alarms, modified alarms, and alarms
that are removed from the Open Alarms database are termed as
History Alarms.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Search Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 14-8
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
8
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Search Based On Date and Time
— Alarms can be filtered based
on a selected date and time
by defining a date range.
— All the alarms that are in the
defined date/time range are
returned in the search results.
— Select the calendar Icon to
open the date picker dialog to
define the date criteria
— Select on the Clock Icon to
open the time picker dialog to
define the time criteria
— All the date/time attributes
shown correspond to the
ENM server date/time.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Search Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 14-9
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
9
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Search Based On Alarm Attributes
— Alarms can be filtered and searched based on the specified alarm attributes.
— Multiple alarm attributes can be defined for a search
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Search Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 14-10
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
10
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Add Network Topology
1. Browse Topology
2. Search Topology
3. Collections
4. Saved searches
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Search Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 14-11
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
11
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Configure Alarm Search Table Settings
To Configure the Alarm Search Table Settings:
›
Select the Settings Icon to open the Table
Settings Dialog
›
Select columns to be shown. Unselect
columns to hide
›
To change the column order, drag the
columns up or down the column list
›
Click on the push pin icon to freeze a column
on left side of the alarm results table
›
After selecting the preferred settings, click
on the “Apply” button to save the table
settings for the search results table
›
The table settings will be saved for the
current workspace
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Search Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 14-12
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
12
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Manage Workspaces
To save the current search criteria
and table settings in a new
workspace:
• Open the Workspace Menu from
the Action Bar.
• Select “Rename” to rename the
“Untitled Workspace”
To create a new workspace
• Select “New” from the
workspaces menu
To open an existing workspace:
• Select “Open” from the
workspaces menu. Workspaces
can be opened in a new tab
To delete a Workspace:
• Click on the trashcan icon in the
Open Workspaces dialog next
the workspace name to delete it
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Search Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 14-13
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
13
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Export Alarm Search Results
To export the alarm search
results in Comma Separated
Variable (CSV ) format:
› Select one or more alarms
in alarm results list
› Click on the “Export.”
Button from the action bar
› A message indicating the
export is being generated
will open in a new tab
› If Excel is installed on the
users computer, the user
will get a prompt to open
the file in Excel.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Search Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 14-14
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
14
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Summary
In this module you have learned to:
— Describe features and functions of the ENM Alarm Search application.
— Launch the Alarm Search and access the application’s online help.
— Describe Alarm Search application layout.
— Configure the Alarm Search criteria.
— View and export the Alarm Search results.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Alarm Search Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 14-15
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
15
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
16
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM 19 Operations for
Radio Access Network
Using theENM Alarm Supervision Status
Application
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using theENM Alarm Supervision Status Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 15-0
DISCLAIMER
This book is a training document and contains simplifications. Therefore, it must
not be considered as a specification of the system. The contents of this
document are subject to revision without notice due to ongoing progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any
error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
This document is not intended to replace the technical documentation that was
shipped with your system. Always refer to that technical documentation during
operation and maintenance.
© Ericsson AB 2019
This document was produced by Ericsson AB.
The book is to be used for training purposes only and it is strictly prohibited to
copy, reproduce, disclose or distribute it in any manner without the express
written consent from Ericsson.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
0
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Objectives
In this module you will learn to:
— Describe features and functions of the Alarm Supervision Status application
— Launch the Alarm Supervision Status application and access the application’s online help
— Describe Alarm Supervision Status application layout
— View the network supervision summary
— Filter the network supervision details by network element and supervision states
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using theENM Alarm Supervision Status Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 15-1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
1
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Alarm Supervision Status Overview
— Alarm Supervision Status displays information related to
node connection and alarm synchronization status.
— It allows the user to enable, disable, and synchronize
supervision on single or multiple nodes.
— The user must have proper rights in ENM to perform
Enable, Disable, and Synchronize Supervision
operations.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using theENM Alarm Supervision Status Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 15-2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
2
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Launch Alarm Supervision Status
— The Alarm Supervision Status application link is located in
“Monitoring” category on the ENM Application Launcher page
— Select the “Alarm Supervision Status ” link to launch the
application
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using theENM Alarm Supervision Status Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 15-3
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
3
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Alarm Supervision Status Page Layout
Action Bar
Supervision
Summary
Network Element
Table
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using theENM Alarm Supervision Status Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 15-4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
4
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Access Alarm Supervision Status Application
Help
• To access the Alarm
Supervision Status
Application Help, launch
the Alarm Supervision
Status application.
• Expand the Help menu in
the upper right corner of
the page.
• Select “App Help”.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using theENM Alarm Supervision Status Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 15-5
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
5
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Supervision Summary
— The Alarm Supervision Status summary area provides an overview of the number of nodes
in the monitored supervision states.
— Clicking on an Alarm Supervision Status counter in the summary will filter the supervision
details for the nodes that are in the selected state
— If the summary count is more than 999 for a node state, the count is displayed as K+
— To view the actual count of a node state, hover over the node count
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using theENM Alarm Supervision Status Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 15-6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
6
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Supervision Summary (1 of 2)
Label
Description
Supervision Off
The number of nodes on which alarm supervision is disabled.
Node Suspended
A node status is changed to suspended mode when there is a high
inflow of alarms from that node. ENM stops processing the alarms on a
suspended node. This suspended count represents the number of nodes
that are in a suspended state.
Heartbeat Failure
The number of nodes not reachable to ENM.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using theENM Alarm Supervision Status Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 15-7
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
7
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Supervision Summary (1 of 2)
Label
Description
Technician Present
The number of nodes where a technician is present. It is
only available for node types where the feature is
supported.
Sync Ongoing
The number of nodes in an ongoing synchronization
state.
Alarm Suppressed
The Alarm Suppressed Alarm is generated by the node.
When this occurs the node stops reporting the alarms to
ENM. The Alarm Suppressed count represents the
number of nodes in an alarm-suppressed state.
Out of Synchronization
When ENM and the node are not synchronized, an
OUT_OF_SYNC alarm is generated indicating that the
list of alarms in ENM and in the node are different.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using theENM Alarm Supervision Status Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 15-8
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
8
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Supervision Operations
Operation
Description
Enable Supervision
Enable Supervision is only available when a node’s Supervision Status is
OFF.
Disable Supervision
Disable Supervision is available when a node’s Supervision Status is ON.
Initiate Alarm Synchronization
Initiate Alarm Synchronization is only available when a node’s
Supervision Status is ON.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using theENM Alarm Supervision Status Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 15-9
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
9
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Node Details - Filtering
— All columns can be filtered in the Network Element Table
— To filter by node name, enter a node name in the Name column filter
box and select the matching options.
— All other columns have a drop down list of the available values to filter
by.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using theENM Alarm Supervision Status Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 15-10
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
10
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Summary
In this module you have learned to:
— Describe features and functions of the Alarm Supervision Status application
— Launch the Alarm Supervision Status application and access the application’s online help
— Describe Alarm Supervision Status application layout
— View the network supervision summary
— Filter the network supervision details by network element and supervision states
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using theENM Alarm Supervision Status Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 15-11
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
11
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
12
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM 19 Operations for
Radio Access Network
Using the ENM Network Health Monitor
Application
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Health Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 16-0
DISCLAIMER
This book is a training document and contains simplifications. Therefore, it must
not be considered as a specification of the system. The contents of this
document are subject to revision without notice due to ongoing progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any
error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
This document is not intended to replace the technical documentation that was
shipped with your system. Always refer to that technical documentation during
operation and maintenance.
© Ericsson AB 2019
This document was produced by Ericsson AB.
The book is to be used for training purposes only and it is strictly prohibited to
copy, reproduce, disclose or distribute it in any manner without the express
written consent from Ericsson.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
0
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Objectives
In this module you will learn to:
— Describe features and functions of the Network Health Monitor application.
— Launch the Network Health Monitor and access the application’s online help.
— Describe and configure the Network Health Monitor application.
— Monitor the network using the Network Heath Monitor dashboard widgets.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Health Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 16-1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
1
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Network Health Monitor Overview
Provides a summarized view using
dashboard widgets to monitor:
› Key Performance Indicators
(KPIs)
›
›
Node Cell Status
Node Configuration Sync
Status
›
Alarm Statistics
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Health Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 16-2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
2
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Network Health Monitor (NHM) Widgets
›
›
›
›
›
›
›
›
Nodes Breached per KPI
Worst Performing Nodes By KPI
Network State
Network Sync Status
Most Problematic Node by Alarm Count *
Alarm Severity Summary *
Most Problematic Alarm Type By Count *
Alarm Type Summary *
* Alarm related widgets are covered in the Alarm Overview
application course module
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Health Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 16-3
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
3
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Launch Network Health Monitor
— The Network Health Monitor application link is located in “Monitoring”
category on the ENM Application Launcher page
— Select the “Network Health Monitor” link to launch the application
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Health Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 16-4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
4
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Network Health Monitor Page Layout
Action Bar
Topology
Tree
Application
Widgets
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Health Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 16-5
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
5
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Access Network Health Monitor Application
Help
›
›
›
To access the Network
Health Monitor Application
Help, launch the Alarm
Monitor application.
Expand the Help menu in
the upper right corner of
the page.
Select “App Help”.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Health Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 16-6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
6
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Network Health Monitor Setup
1. Add network
Nodes
1
2
3
2. Add widgets.
3. Customize
the
application
layout.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Health Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 16-7
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
7
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Add Network Topology
1. Browse Topology
2. Search Topology
3. Saved searches
4. Collections
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Health Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 16-8
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
8
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Add a Widget
1
1. Click “Add a
Widget.” on the
action bar
2. Expand the “Select
a Widget”
dropdown list
3. Select a Widget
from the list
4. Click on the “Save”
button
2
3
4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Health Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 16-9
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
9
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Customize Widget Layout
1. Expand the
“Work Space”
Dropdown on
the action Bar
2. Click on
“Customize
Layout.”
1
3
2
3. Select a layout
style.
4. Click on the
“Apply.” button
4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Health Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 16-10
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
10
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Key Performance Indicators (KPI) Management
in ENM
› KPIs used in the KPI based widgets are configured
and activated in the ENM KPI Management
application. *
› KPIs can be Ericsson Pre-defined or User Defined
› Nodes must be assigned to a KPI in the ENM KPI
Management application for values to appear in the
KPI based widgets
› KPIs are updated after performance files are
received from the nodes at the end of each
Recording Period (ROP)
* Covered in the Using the KPI Management course module
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Health Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 16-11
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
11
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Configuring KPI Based Widgets
›
›
›
›
›
›
›
To configure the KPI based
widgets, click on the gear icon.
Active KPIs are activated and
should show KPI values.
Inactive KPIs are not activated
and no values will shown for
these KPIs.
Expand a KPI to view the KPI
settings.
Select the KPI to add to the
widget
Only the “Nodes Breached per
KPI” widget allow multiple
KPIs to be selected.
Click on the “Save” button to
save the settings.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Health Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 16-12
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
12
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Nodes Breached per KPI Widget
— Displays the number of nodes breaching the KPI threshold value for the
configured KPIs.
— Click on any row within the widget to navigate to Network Health Analysis
application to view the KPI values for the breached nodes.
— Inactive KPIs and active KPIs with no threshold configured both display
N/A for the breach count.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Health Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 16-13
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
13
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Worst Performing Nodes By KPI Widget
› The KPIs monitored can be cell-level KPIs based on
EUtranCellFDD/TDD counters or node-level KPIs
based on ENodeBFunction counters.
› For Cell-level KPIs, the nodes are ranked based on the
KPI values of the underlying cells.
› The node considered the worst node is the node with
the worst KPI value for a single cell.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Health Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 16-14
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
14
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Worst Performing Nodes By KPI - LTE
›
›
›
KPI values that exceed the KPI threshold value are emphasized in red.
Nodes are listed by KPI value in descending or ascending order based on
direction of the KPI threshold setting
Click on any row within the widget to navigate to Node Monitor to see
more details for the node
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Health Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 16-15
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
15
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Most Problematic Node By Alarm Count WCDMA
›
Displays the top most problematic nodes in descending order
based on the alarm count of imported nodes in WCDMA Network
›
Select the no. of nodes to be shown drop down list and selected the
number of nodes to be displayed .The allowed options are 5,10 and 20
items.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Health Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 16-16
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
16
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Most Problematic Node By Alarm Count - GSM
›
Displays the top most problematic nodes in descending order
based on the alarm count of imported nodes in GSM Network
›
Left click on the selected object to display a context menu. This shows a
list of available actions.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Health Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 16-17
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
17
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Network Operational State Widget
Cell State
Non-Operational
Partial
Description
All cells are in an non-operational state
At least one but not all its cells are in a nonoperational state.
Cell State
Non-Operational
Partial
Operational
All its cells are in an operational state.
Operational
Unknown:
The node may not be synchronized with ENM.
Unknown:
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Health Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 16-18
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
18
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
View Cells in a Selected State
— Click on a cell state in the Network State to open the Network Health
Analysis for the selected state to view operations menu.
— Click on Analyze Network Health to open the Network Health Analysis
page to view cell state details
— Other ENM applications are also listed that can be launched
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Health Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 16-19
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
19
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Network Sync CM Status Widget
— Provides the Configuration Management (CM) synchronization status for the user
selected nodes
— If the synchronization state of a monitored node changes, the Network Sync Status
widget dynamically updates.
— Non-Synchronized indicates that the node’s Configuration Management data is not
synchronized with ENM
— Click on a synchronization status state to navigate to Network Health Analysis to view a
list of nodes in the selected synchronization state.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Health Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 16-20
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
20
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
View Sync State Details
•
•
•
Click on a Sync State to open the selected state to view the operations menu.
Click on Analyze Network Health to open the Network Health Analysis page
Select a node to perform other operations from the action bar for selected node
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Health Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 16-21
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
21
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Summary
In this module you have learned to:
— Describe features and functions of the Network Health Monitor application.
— Launch the Network Health Monitor and access the application’s online help.
— Describe and configure the Network Health Monitor application.
— Monitor the network using the Network Heath Monitor dashboard widgets.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Health Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 16-22
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
22
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
23
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM 19 Operations for
Radio Access Network
Using the ENM Network Health Analysis
Application
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Health Analysis Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 17-0
DISCLAIMER
This book is a training document and contains simplifications. Therefore, it must
not be considered as a specification of the system. The contents of this
document are subject to revision without notice due to ongoing progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any
error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
This document is not intended to replace the technical documentation that was
shipped with your system. Always refer to that technical documentation during
operation and maintenance.
© Ericsson AB 2019
This document was produced by Ericsson AB.
The book is to be used for training purposes only and it is strictly prohibited to
copy, reproduce, disclose or distribute it in any manner without the express
written consent from Ericsson.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
0
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Objectives
In this module you will learn to:
— Describe features and functions of the Network Health Analysis application.
— Launch the Network Health Analysis and access the application’s online help.
— Describe Network Health Analysis application layout.
— Configure the KPIs Network Health Analysis
— View and export the network Configuration Management (CM) state, Fault Management (FM) Alarm Count and Key
Performance Indicator (KPI) data
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Health Analysis Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 17-1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
1
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Network Health Analysis Status Overview
— Network Health Analysis (NHA) facilitates by displaying
node by node Configuration Management (CM) state, Fault
Management (FM) Alarm Count and Key Performance
Indicator (KPI) data
— Supported for s eNodeB DU Radio, eNodeB Baseband
Radio and eNodeB Pico Radio Nodes.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Health Analysis Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 17-2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
2
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Launch Network Health Analysis
— The Network Health Analysis application link is located in
“Monitoring” category on the ENM Application Launcher page
— Select the “Network Health Analysis ” link to launch the application
— The application can also be launched from the Network Health
monitor from the Network State and KPI widgets
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Health Analysis Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 17-3
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
3
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Access Network Health Analysis Application Help
• To access the Network
Health Analysis Help,
launch the Alarm Overview
application.
• Expand the Help menu in
the upper right corner of
the page.
• Select “App Help”.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Health Analysis Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 17-4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
4
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Network Health Analysis – Page Layout
The application now
contains 5 tabs:
— Network Tab
— Applied Tab
— Setup Tab
— Node Tab
— Cell Tab
Action Bar
Node
Selection
Setup and Results
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Health Analysis Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 17-5
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
5
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Node Scope - Network Tab
— The Network tab contains the scoping panel
— The scoping panel consists of the following tabs:
— Topology - allows nodes and subnetworks to be
selected from the Network topology.
— Collections - allows nodes to be selected via
existing collections.
— Saved Searches - allows nodes to be selected via
saved searches.
— Search - allows nodes to be selected by searching
on supported managed object types.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Health Analysis Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 17-6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
6
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Node Scope – Applied Tab
— The Applied Tab contains a list of
the nodes selected from the Network
tab.
— Nodes can be removed from
selection by clicking on the trash can
icon
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Health Analysis Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 17-7
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
7
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
KPI Tab
— The Setup tab
displays a list of
KPIs. These include
Active and Inactive
KPIs.
— KPI(s) can be
selected or
deselected.
— KPI Results can be
viewed by clicking
the "Analyze Health"
button. Results will
be shown in the Cell
or Node tab
depending on type of
KPI
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Health Analysis Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 17-8
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
8
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Node Tab
The Node tab displays a network element by network element view of :
— Synchronization State
— Operational State
— FM Alarm Count based on the severity
— Node Related KPI values
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Health Analysis Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 17-9
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
9
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Cell Tab
The Cell tab
displays a cell by
cell (for each NE)
view of the:
— Cell
Administrative
— State, Cell
Operational
— State Cell
Availability
Status
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Health Analysis Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 17-10
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
10
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Summary
In this module you have learned to:
— Describe features and functions of the Network Health Analysis application.
— Launch the Network Health Analysis and access the application’s online help.
— Describe Network Health Analysis application layout.
— Configure the KPIs Network Health Analysis
— View and export the network Configuration Management (CM) state, Fault Management (FM) Alarm Count and Key
Performance Indicator (KPI) data
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Network Health Analysis Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 17-11
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
11
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
12
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM 19 Operations for
Radio Access Network
Using the ENM Node Monitor Application
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Node Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 18-0
DISCLAIMER
This book is a training document and contains simplifications. Therefore, it must
not be considered as a specification of the system. The contents of this
document are subject to revision without notice due to ongoing progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any
error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
This document is not intended to replace the technical documentation that was
shipped with your system. Always refer to that technical documentation during
operation and maintenance.
© Ericsson AB 2019
This document was produced by Ericsson AB.
The book is to be used for training purposes only and it is strictly prohibited to
copy, reproduce, disclose or distribute it in any manner without the express
written consent from Ericsson.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
0
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Objectives
In this module you will learn to:
— Describe features and functions of Node Monitor application
— Launch the Node Monitor and access the application’s online help
— Describe and configure the Node Monitor application
— Use the Node Monitor Cell Status Widget to analyze the status of network cells
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Node Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 18-1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
1
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Network Node Monitor Overview
The Node Monitor provides the following
widgets:
— Cell Status
— KPI Viewer
— Alarm Severity Summary *
— Most Problematic Alarm Type By Count
— Alarm Type Summary *
* Alarm related widgets are covered in the
Alarm Overview application course module
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Node Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 18-2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
2
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Launch Node Monitor
— The Node Monitor application link is located in “Monitoring” category
on the ENM Application Launcher page
— Select the “Node Monitor ” link to launch the application
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Node Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 18-3
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
3
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Node Monitor Page Layout
Action Bar
Application
Widgets
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Node Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 18-4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
4
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Access Node Monitor Application Help
›
›
›
To access the Node
Monitor Application Help,
launch the Alarm Search
application.
Expand the Help menu in
the upper right corner of
the page.
Select “App Help”.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Node Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 18-5
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
5
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Node Monitor Configuration
1. Add network
Nodes
1
2
3
2. Add widgets.
3. Customize
the
application
layout.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Node Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 18-6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
6
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Add Network Topology
To add a node to the Node
Monitor:
1. Click on “Add Topology Data
from the Action Bar
2. Select a node from Topology
Tab or the Search Tab
3. Click on “Add” to add the
node to the application
Only one node can be selected
when adding a node to the Node
Monitor.
Topology Tab
Search Tab
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Node Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 18-7
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
7
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Add a Widget
1
1. Click “Add a
Widget.” on the
action bar
2. Expand the
“Select a Widget”
dropdown list
3. Select a Widget
from the list
4. Click on the “Save”
button
2
3
4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Node Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 18-8
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
8
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Customize Widget Layout
1. Expand the
“Work Space”
Dropdown on
the action Bar
2. Click on
“Customize
Layout.”
1
3
2
3. Select a layout
style.
4. Click on the
“Apply.” button
4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Node Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 18-9
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
9
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Node Monitor Cell Status Widget
›
›
›
›
›
The Cell Status widget allows users to monitor a Key Performance
Indicator (KPI) for individual cells for a specific network element.
Each cell is displayed in an individual row and contains both cell type
and cell ID.
The widget contains a graphical representation of the values
calculated for the specified KPI over the last two hours at 15-minute
intervals.
The widget automatically updates after every Report Output Period
(ROP) for Performance Management (PM) Statistical Counter files.
The Cell Status widget supports eNodeB DU Radio, Baseband Radio,
Node DU Radio and Pico Radio network elements
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Node Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 18-10
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
10
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Cell Status Widget Configuration
›
›
›
›
›
›
To configure the Cell Status
widget, click on the gear icon.
Expand a KPI to view the KPI
settings.
Select the KPI to add to the
widget
Click on the “Save” button to save
the settings.
Active KPIs are activated and
should show KPI values in
widget.
Inactive KPIs are not activated
and no values will be shown for
these KPIs
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Node Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 18-11
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
11
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
View Cell Status
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Node Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 18-12
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
12
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
KPI Viewer
— The KPI Viewer widget monitors and displays KPI data for all selected
network element objects for selected KPIs.
— The object name and corresponding KPI value is displayed in the KPI
Viewer table.
— The threshold (if set) for the relevant KPI is displayed beside the KPI name
in the header.
— If a KPI value is in breach of its threshold the value is displayed in red.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Node Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 18-13
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
13
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Summary
In this module you have learned to:
— Describe features and functions of Node Monitor application
— Launch the Node Monitor and access the application’s online help
— Describe and configure the Node Monitor application
— Use the Node Monitor Cell Status Widget to analyze the status of network cells
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Node Monitor Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 18-14
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
14
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
15
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM 19 Operations for
Radio Access Network
Using the ENM Node Health Check Application
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Node Health Check Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 19-0
DISCLAIMER
This book is a training document and contains simplifications. Therefore, it must
not be considered as a specification of the system. The contents of this
document are subject to revision without notice due to ongoing progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any
error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
This document is not intended to replace the technical documentation that was
shipped with your system. Always refer to that technical documentation during
operation and maintenance.
© Ericsson AB 2019
This document was produced by Ericsson AB.
The book is to be used for training purposes only and it is strictly prohibited to
copy, reproduce, disclose or distribute it in any manner without the express
written consent from Ericsson.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
0
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Objectives
In this module you will learn to:
— Describe features and functions of the ENM Node Health Check application.
— Launch the Node Health Check and access the application’s online help.
— Describe Node Health Check application layout.
— Configure the Node Health Check criteria.
— View and export the Node Health Check results
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Node Health Check Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 19-1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
1
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Launch Node Health Check
— The Node Health Check application link is located in “Monitoring”
category on the ENM Application Launcher page
— Select the “Node Health Check” link to launch the application
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Node Health Check Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 19-2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
2
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Node Health Check (NHC) Application Layout
Action Bar
Action Bar
Reports
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Node Health Check Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 19-3
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
3
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Access Node Health Check Application Help
• To access the Node Health
Check Application Help,
launch the Node Health
Check application.
• Expand the Help menu in
the upper right corner of
the page.
• Select “App Help”.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Node Health Check Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 19-4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
4
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Launch the Health Check Report Setup Wizard
— From the main Health Check page
— Click on the "Setup and Run Report" button
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Node Health Check Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 19-5
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
5
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Enter Report Details
— Use the default
report name,
— Or edit the
default report
name.
— Or enter a new
report name
— Enter a optional
Report
Description if
needed.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Node Health Check Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 19-6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
6
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Select Nodes
— Click on "Add
Topology Data"
button
— Select nodes to run
health check on.
— Click on next
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Node Health Check Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 19-7
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
7
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Select Health Check Configuration
— Expand the
Health Check
Configuration
dropdown list.
— Select a
configuration
from the list
— Click on "Next"
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Node Health Check Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 19-8
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
8
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Schedule Health Check
— Select the
scheduling method
— Immediate
— Scheduled
— Periodic
— Enter any required
parameters
— Click on "Next"
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Node Health Check Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 19-9
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
9
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Review Health Check Report Setup
— Review the
health check
report setup
— Click on the finish
button
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Node Health Check Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 19-10
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
10
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Review Health Check Results
— Select one reports from the report list
— Click on "View Report Details" button from the action bar
— A report can also be viewed by double clicking on a report name in the report list.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Node Health Check Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 19-11
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
11
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Health Check Report Details
— The Report Details page provides detailed information about the health status of the nodes in the
selected report. It provides a summary of overall node health status
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Node Health Check Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 19-12
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
12
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Health Check Rule Execution Details
Health Check Rule Execution Details displays the results of each executed rule
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Node Health Check Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 19-13
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
13
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
View Health Check Report Logs
— The Report Logs page displays logs for the activities performed by an NHC report.
— The Report logs display the notification information received from the nodes and other messages
indicating the progress of node activities in the report
— To launch the Report Logs page, select a node in the Node Health Status table >View Report Logs.
— By default, INFO level logs are displayed.
— Use the Log Level drop-down to choose level of information displayed in the table.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Node Health Check Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 19-14
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
14
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Summary
In this module you have learned to:
— Describe features and functions of the ENM Node Health Check application.
— Launch the Node Health Check and access the application’s online help.
— Describe Node Health Check application layout.
— Configure the Node Health Check criteria.
— View and export the Node Health Check results
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Using the ENM Node Health Check Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 19-15
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
15
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
16
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM 19 Operations for
Radio Access Network
Usng the ENM Cell Management Application
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Usng the ENM Cell Management Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 20-0
DISCLAIMER
This book is a training document and contains simplifications. Therefore, it must
not be considered as a specification of the system. The contents of this
document are subject to revision without notice due to ongoing progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any
error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
This document is not intended to replace the technical documentation that was
shipped with your system. Always refer to that technical documentation during
operation and maintenance.
© Ericsson AB 2019
This document was produced by Ericsson AB.
The book is to be used for training purposes only and it is strictly prohibited to
copy, reproduce, disclose or distribute it in any manner without the express
written consent from Ericsson.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
0
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Objectives
In this module you will learn to:
— Describe the features and functions of the Cell Management application.
— Launch the Cell Management application and access the application's online help
— List and describe the Cell Management application page layout
— View the status and properties of the network cells
— Lock/unlock network cells.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Usng the ENM Cell Management Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 20-1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
1
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Cell Management Overview
— Provides the following functionality cell management activities for
LTE cells:
— Allows nodes to be selected from the network topology, collections, saved
searches, or from a user search.
— Displays cells for selected nodes in a table, including the cell status and other
important cell data.
— Highlights cells that need attention.
— Allows cells to be locked, soft locked, unlocked and view relations.
— Each user has his own settings. Table column widths are saved automatically.
— Allows Parameter Management to be launched with a fixed set of managed
objects and parameters determined by the cells selected.
— Allows relations data to be viewed for the selected LTE and WCDMA cells
— Allows Parameter Management to be launched with a fixed set of a relation
parameters. These are determined by the relations selected.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Usng the ENM Cell Management Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 20-2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
2
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Supported Node Types
— Cell Management supports the following Node Types
—
—
—
—
—
—
ERBS
RadioNode
MSRBS_V1
RNC
RBS
BSC
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Usng the ENM Cell Management Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 20-3
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
3
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Cell Management User Roles
Required User Roles
— Cell_Management_Administrator- View cells and cell related
parameters, change the administrative state of cells, and view
relations
— Cell_Management_Administrator,
Parameter_Management_Administrato - Launch Parameter
Management with a fixed set of managed objects and
parameters determined by the cells selected. Also launch for a
fixed set of a relation parameters determined by the relations
selected.
— Cell_Management_Operator - View cells, cell related
parameters, and view relations
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Usng the ENM Cell Management Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 20-4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
4
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Launch Cell Management
— The Cell Management application link is located in the “Provisioning”
category on the ENM Application Launcher page
— Select the “Cell Management ” link to launch the application
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Usng the ENM Cell Management Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 20-5
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
5
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Cell Management Application Layout
Action Bar
Topology
Cell Table
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Usng the ENM Cell Management Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 20-6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
6
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Cell Management Help
•
•
Click on “App
Help” in the
ENM Help
Menu.
Select
“Tutorials” to
list the
available
tutorials
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Usng the ENM Cell Management Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 20-7
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
7
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Select Cell Management Scope
•
•
•
•
Topology - allows nodes and
subnetworks to be selected
directly from the network
topology.
Search - allows nodes to be
selected by searching on
supported managed object
types.
Collections - allows nodes to be
selected via existing collections.
SavedSearches - allows nodes
to be selected via existing saved
searches
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Usng the ENM Cell Management Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 20-8
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
8
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Scoping Panel Behavior
•
•
•
•
•
Items selected in the scoping panel tabs are retained when navigating
between the tabs.
The tabs only display nodes supported by the Cell Management application
In the case of collections and saved searches, cells will only be fetched for
supported nodes contained within them.
Subnetworks are always displayed in the topology tab, but they may be
empty if they contain no supported node types.
Selecting a subnetwork in the topology tab displays the cells for all
supported nodes contained directly beneath that subnetwork. It will not
display the cells for any nested subnetworks contained in the subnetwork.
Nested subnetworks must be selected to view the cells for the nodes they
contain.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Usng the ENM Cell Management Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 20-9
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
9
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Cells Table
The cell tabs display will vary based on the nodes selected
The cell attributes displayed will vary depending on the Cell Type
Cell Tab
Cell Type
LTE
EUtranCellFDD and EUtranCellTD
WCDMA
UtranCell
NbIotCell
NB-IOT
GSM
GeranCell
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Usng the ENM Cell Management Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 20-10
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
10
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Cell Table Customization
To customize the cell attributes
•
•
•
Select a Cell Tab
Click on the gear icon
Use the Table Settings to show/hide,
pin or reorder attributes
The cell attributes listed in the Table
Settings will depend on cell type.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Usng the ENM Cell Management Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 20-11
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
11
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Additional Cell Attributes
When the +Add additional cell parameters
button is clicked, the Select Parameters
panel is displayed.
The following are displayed following:
• UtranCell attributes for WCDMA cells
• EUtranCellFDD and EUtranCellTDD
attributes for LTE cells
• NbIotCell attributes for NBIOT cells
• GeranCell attributes for GSM cell
Click the check box to add the attributes to
the table setting.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Usng the ENM Cell Management Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 20-12
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
12
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Cell Filtering
— Cells can be filtered using the cell filter feature
— Create a filter by selecting the funnel icon to open the filter pane
— Select filter values and apply to filter the cells
— Filtering on cell attributes is also supported
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Usng the ENM Cell Management Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 20-13
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
13
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Cell Status Color Coding
The cell table displays cell attribute values.
The following columns are colored based on the below
conditions:
• AdministrativeState
• OperationalState
• AvailablityStatus
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Usng the ENM Cell Management Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 20-14
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
14
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Export Cells
Cell information for all or
selected cells can be exported
to a CSV file by:
1.
2.
3.
Select cells
Click on “Export” from the
action bar
Open or save file to view
exported cell information
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Usng the ENM Cell Management Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 20-15
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
15
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
View Cell Relations
LTE and WCDMA Cell Frequency
Relations can be viewed by:
1. Select cells
2. Select Relation type from
View Relations dropdown
list
3. Cell Frequency Relations will
be display for the select cells
and Cell Frequency Relations
type
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Usng the ENM Cell Management Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 20-16
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
16
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Cell Relations Table
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
For outgoing relations, the cell selected in the WCDMA or LTE cells tab is the source cell.
For incoming relations, the cell selected in the WCDMA or LTE cells tab is the target cell.
For WCDMA cells, the default data to show is: RNC Name, Base Station Name, Cell Name, PLMN ID, RNC ID,
and Cell Id.
For LTE cells, the default data to show is: Base Station Name, Cell Name, PLMN ID, eNB ID, and Cell Id.
If the WCDMA cells are not managed by ENM, the RNC Name, Base Station Name + Cell Name are left
empty, as this data is not available in ENM.
If the LTE cells are not managed by ENM, the Base Station Name + Cell Name are left empty, as this data is
not available in ENM.
A WCDMA or LTE cells can be a source cell or target cell, depending on the relation type.
For relations data, when the cells belong to different node types then some of the attributes are different as
per model.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Usng the ENM Cell Management Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 20-17
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
17
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Lock/Unlock Cells
1.
2.
3.
4.
Locking cells may cause traffic disturbances
Select the required Cell(s) to Lock from the Cell table select the cells to lock using the following methods:
— Select the rows from the table to select the required cells.
— Use the shift key to select consecutive cells by selecting the first and last rows.
— Select the check box in the top left corner of the table to select all the cells.
Select the Lock Cell(s) operation
— To lock the selected cells, right click on one of the selected cells and select Lock Cells from the context menu,
or select the Lock Cells button in the system bar.
Verify and lock cells
— Verify the list of cells to lock or unlock in the Lock Cells Summary.
— Confirm Lock Cell(s)
Review Cells summary the Lock/Unlock operation was successful
— A Failure message will be presented if lock/unlock operation fails
The Process of unlocking cells is identical except for select Unlock instead of Lock.
The process is the same for all cell types (GSM/WCDMA/LTE/5G)
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Usng the ENM Cell Management Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 20-18
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
18
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Editing Cell Parameters
1.
Select Required Cells
1.
2.
3.
2.
Launch Cell Management
Select a node or nodes from the Topology tab in the Network panel.
From the Cells table, select the required cell(s).
Edit Cell Relations
1.
2.
Click Edit Cells.
The Parameter Management application will be launched in a separate
browser tab.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Usng the ENM Cell Management Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 20-19
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
19
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Editing Cell Relation Parameters
1.
Select Required Cells
1.
2.
3.
2.
Select Relations to Send to Parameter Editor
1.
3.
Launch Cell Management
Select a node or nodes from the Topology tab in the Network panel.
From the Cells table, select the required cell(s).
Select required relations from the Relations table
Edit Cell Relations
1.
2.
Select the required relations, and click Edit Relations.
The Parameter Management application will be launched in a separate
browser tab.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Usng the ENM Cell Management Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 20-20
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
20
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Summary
In this module you have learned to:
— Describe the features and functions of the Cell Management application.
— Launch the Cell Management application and access the application's online help
— List and describe the Cell Management application page layout
— View the status and properties of the network cells
— Lock/unlock network cells.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Usng the ENM Cell Management Application | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 20-21
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
21
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
22
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM 19 Operations for
Radio Access Network
Network Monitoring using ENM CLI
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-0
DISCLAIMER
This book is a training document and contains simplifications. Therefore, it must
not be considered as a specification of the system. The contents of this
document are subject to revision without notice due to ongoing progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any
error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
This document is not intended to replace the technical documentation that was
shipped with your system. Always refer to that technical documentation during
operation and maintenance.
© Ericsson AB 2019
This document was produced by Ericsson AB.
The book is to be used for training purposes only and it is strictly prohibited to
copy, reproduce, disclose or distribute it in any manner without the express
written consent from Ericsson.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
0
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Objectives
In this module you will learn to:
— Describe the ENM Command Line Interface application features
— Use ENM CLI cmedit Command Set to monitor Radio Access Nodes
— List the ENM CLI command sets used to monitor the network
— Launch the ENM CLI and access the online help for monitoring nodes using the CLI
— Check the status of network objects using the ENM CLI
— Understand how to lock and unlock the node hardware and node managed objects
— Describe how to perform restarts on node hardware units and nodes
— Use the ENM CLI Netlog command set to upload and export node logs
— Use the Network Health Check ENM CLI command set to create and export node health check reports
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
1
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
CLI Overview
•
•
•
•
Provides a single command line interface for
managing all nodes that support a modeled
interface.
Enables the user to perform Configuration
and Fault Management operations on nodes
managed by ENM.
Is a model-driven CLI that requires the user to
understand the node’s Managed Object(MO)
structure and MO attributes.
Can perform operations such as get, set and
actions on single or multiple nodes
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
2
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM CLI Page Layout
Command
Results
Command Entry
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-3
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
3
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Access ENM CLI Application Help
To access the ENM CLI Application Help, Launch the Command Line Interface.
• Expand the Help menu in the upper right corner of the page.
• Select “App Help”.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
4
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM CLI User Interface
•
The ENM CLI provides a command prompt for
the user to enter commands.
•
After executing a command, a response will be
returned providing the command results or an
error message if the command was not properly
formatted.
•
Command history can be retrieved by using up
and down arrow keys to scroll through previous
commands.
•
Command history is only available for the
current ENM CLI session
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-5
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
5
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Network Monitoring Tasks Using the cmedit
Command Set
—Check Cell Status
—Lock / Unlock Cells
—Check MME and EnodeB X2 Link Status
—Check Hardware Status
—List Hardware Details
—Lock / Unlock Hardware Plugin Units
—Restart Node and Hardware Plugin Units
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
6
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Launch ENM Command Line Interface (CLI)
— The ENM Command Line Interface (CLI) application link is located in
the “Provisioning” category on the ENM Application Launcher page
— Select the “Command Line Interface (CLI)” link to launch the
application
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-7
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
7
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
cmedit Overview
› The cmedit command set can be used to read,
manipulate, and export configuration management
data.
› All Managed Object (MO) data specified in the
cmedit is modeled.
› The cmedit commands cannot be interrupted after
the command has been entered in the CLI
application.
› The cmedit commands are subject to access control.
Users must have the proper ENM authority to use the
commands.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-8
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
8
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
cmedit Command Descriptions For Network
Monitoring
Command
Command Description
Describe
Describes an MO Class, MO Instance, or any of its attributes
Get
Fetches one or more instances of Managed Objects
Set
Modifies one or more instances of a Managed Objects
Action
Preform action on a Managed Object
Caution: Set and Action commands may cause network disturbances
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-9
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
9
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
cmedit Command Set Help
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-10
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
10
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM CLI – “help cmedit”
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-11
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
11
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM CLI Command Scope Examples
cmedit get {scope} {MO}
Description
Command
List a specific MO for all
nodes
cmedit get * ManagedElement
List a specific MO for all
nodes which match a
partial node name
cmedit get LTE* ManagedElement
List a specific MO for a
specific node name
cmedit get LTE03ERBS00001 ManagedElement
List a specific MO using a
collection
cmedit get My_Collection ManagedElement
List a specific MO using a
collection and a specific
node
cmedit get My_Collection;LTE03ERBS00005 ManagedElement
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-12
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
12
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM CLI - SavedSearch
— Saved searches can be used in the ENM CLI cmedit command set to
define the set nodes for the command
— List Saved Search information for the current user
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-13
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
13
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
cmedit describe Command Examples
cmedit describe {MO}
Description
Command
Describe all attributes for a
specific MO in list format
cmedit describe EUtranCellFDD.*
Describe all attributes for a
specific MO in tabular format
cmedit describe EUtranCellFDD.* ‐t
Describe a attributes for a
specific MO
cmedit describe EUtranCellFDD.operationalState
Describe multiple attributes for cmedit describe
EUtranCellFDD.(operationalState,administrativeState,
a specific MO
availabilityStatus,cellBarred) ‐t
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-14
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
14
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Check Cell Status For All Cells on a Node - LTE
cmedit get LTE01ERBS00002
EUtranCellFDD.(operationalState,administrativeState,
availabilityStatus,cellBarred) –t
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-15
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
15
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Check Cell Status For All Cells on a Node WCDMA
cmedit get MSME8 NodeBLocalCell.(operationalState,
administrativeState,availabilityStatus) –t
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-16
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
16
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Check Cell Status For All Cells on a Node GSM
cmedit get MSME5 AbisIp.(operationalState,administrativeState,) –t
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-17
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
17
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Get Hardware Details For All Radios On A
Selected Node
cmedit get MSME10 FieldreplaceableUnit.(productData) –t
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-18
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
18
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Check IUB,MME and X2 Link Status
Check status of IUB links on a node(WCDMA RNC)
cmedit get IubLink.(operationalState,administrativeState,availabilityStatus) –t
MeContext,ManagedElement,RncFunction,IubLink
NodeId
EVO303
EVO303
RncFunctionId
1
1
IubLInkId
MSME10
rbs
administrativeState
UNLOCKED
LOCKED
availabilityStatus
0
2
operationalState
EBANBLED
DISABLED
Check status of MME links on a node(LTE RBS)
cmedit get lienb4275 TermPointToMme.(operationalState,administrativeState,availabilityStatus) –t
MeContext,ManagedElement,Equipment,RbsSubrack,RbsSlot,AuxPlugInUnit
NodeId
Lienb4275
ParentId
1
AuxPlugInUnitId
LI4275RUL1
administrativeState
UNLOCKED
availabilityStatus
NO_STATUS
operationalIndicator
STEADY_ON
operationalState
ENABLED
Check status of X2 links on a node(LTE RBS)
cmedit get LTE03ERBS00002 TermPointToENB.(operationalState,administrativeState,availabilityStatus) –t
MeContext,ManagedElement,ENodeBFunction,EUtraNetwork,ExternalENodeBFunction,TermPointToENB
NodeId
ParentId
TermPointToENBId
administrativeState
availabilityStatus
LTE03ERBS00002
LTE02ERBS00151
1
LOCKED
NO_STATUS
LTE03ERBS00002
LTE02ERBS00152
1
LOCKED
NO_STATUS
operationalState
DISABLED
DISABLED
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-19
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
19
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Lock And Unlock All Cells On A Node - LTE
Lock all Cells on a Node:
cmedit set LTE01ERBS00003 EUtranCellFDD
administrativeState=LOCKED
Warning: Locking cells will affect traffic. The above commands will lock all cells on a
node.
Unlock all Cells on Node:
cmedit set LTE01ERBS00003 EUtranCellFDD
administrativeState=UNLOCKED
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-20
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
20
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Lock/Unlock all Cells on a Node - WCDMA
Lock all Cells on a Node:
cmedit set RBS01 NodeBLocalCell administrative State=LOCKED
Warning: Locking cells will affect traffic. The above commands will lock all cells on a
node.
Unlock all Cells on a Node:
cmedit set RBS01 NodeBLocalCell administrative State=UNLOCKED
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-21
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
21
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Lock/Unlock all Cells on a Node - GSM
Lock all Cells on a Node:
cmedit set RadioNode01 AbisIp administrative State=LOCKED
Warning: Locking cells will affect traffic. The above commands will lock all cells on a
node.
Unlock all Cells on a Node:
cmedit set MSME5 AbisIp administrative State=UNLOCKED
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-22
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
22
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Lock And Unlock A Selected Cell on a Node LTE
Lock selected cell on a Node:
cmedit set LTE01ERBS00003
EUtranCellFDD.(EUtranCellFDDId==LTE01ERBS01)
administrativeState=LOCKED
— Unlock selected cell on a Node:
cmedit set LTE01ERBS00003
EUtranCellFDD.(EUtranCellFDDId==LTE01ERBS01)
administrativeState=UNLOCKED
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-23
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
23
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Lock And Unlock A Selected Cell on a Node WCDMA
Lock selected cell on a Node:
cmedit set RBS01 NodeBLocalCell=S1C1
administrativeState=LOCKED
Unlock selected cell on a Node:
cmedit set RBS01 NodeBLocalCell=S1C1
administrativeState=UNLOCKED
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-24
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
24
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Lock And Unlock A Selected Cell on a Node –
GSM
Lock selected cell on a Node:
cmedit set RadioNode01 AbisIp.(abisipId==1)
administrativeState=LOCKED
Unlock selected cell on a Node:
cmedit set RadioNode01 AbisIp.(abisipId==1)
administrativeState=UNLOCKED
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-25
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
25
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Restart Node – LTE ERBS
cmedit action ERBS001 ManagedElement
manualRestart.(restartRank=RESTART_WARM;
restartReason=PLANNED_RECONFIGURATION;
restartInfo=someInfo)
Warning: Restarting a node will affect traffic.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-26
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
26
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Restart Node – Baseband Radio Node
cmedit action RadioNode01
FieldReplaceableUnit.(FieldReplaceableUnitId==1)
restartunit.(restartRank=RESTART_WARM;
restartReason=PLANNED_RECONFIGURATION;
restartInfo=someInfo)
Warning: Restarting a node will affect traffic.
Note : Baseband Radio supports LTE,WCDMA and GSM technologies
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-27
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
27
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Netlog Overview
— The netlog command set is used to retrieve Network Element logs.
— The user must have NetworkLog_Administrator role to use the netlog command set
— Supported network elements are: eNodeB Baseband Radio Node, NodeB Baseband Radio Node,
eNodeB DU Radio Node, eNodeB Pico Radio Node, SGSN-MME and MGW.
— Supported log types vary depending on node type
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-28
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
28
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
netlog Command Descriptions
Command
Command Description
Describe
Used to get the log types for the network elements
Upload
Create an Upload job for selected or all network element logs
Status
View the status of log upload job
Download
Download uploaded network element logs to user’s browser
Delete
Deletes log upload files
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-29
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
29
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
netlog Describe Command
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-30
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
30
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
netlog upload Command
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-31
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
31
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
netlog status Command
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-32
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
32
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
netlog download Command
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-33
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
33
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
netlog delete Command
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-34
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
34
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Node Health Check (nhc) Command Set
Overview
— The Node Health Check (nhc) command set is used to check the state of the network elements and to
manage acceptance criteria.
— Acceptance criteria is used to determine if a health check passes or fails.
— NHC supports the following node types: ERBS, MGW, RBS and RNC.
— NHC Report are in HTML format
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-35
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
35
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
nhc run, st and dl command Examples
Run Health Check Report
Check Health Check Report Status
Download Health Check Report
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-36
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
36
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Example NHC Report
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-37
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
37
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
nhc Report Data
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-38
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
38
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
nhc Node Type Support
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-39
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
39
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Summary
In this module you have learned to:
— Describe the ENM Command Line Interface application features
— Use ENM CLI cmedit Command Set to monitor Radio Access Nodes
— List the ENM CLI command sets used to monitor the network
— Launch the ENM CLI and access the online help for monitoring nodes using the CLI
— Check the status of network objects using the ENM CLI
— Understand how to lock and unlock the node hardware and node managed objects
— Describe how to perform restarts on node hardware units and nodes
— Use the ENM CLI Netlog command set to upload and export node logs
— Use the Network Health Check ENM CLI command set to create and export node health check reports
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Network Monitoring using ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 21-40
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
40
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
41
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM 19 Operations for
Radio Access Network
Alarm Monitoring Using The ENM CLI
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Alarm Monitoring Using The ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 22-0
DISCLAIMER
This book is a training document and contains simplifications. Therefore, it must
not be considered as a specification of the system. The contents of this
document are subject to revision without notice due to ongoing progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any
error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
This document is not intended to replace the technical documentation that was
shipped with your system. Always refer to that technical documentation during
operation and maintenance.
© Ericsson AB 2019
This document was produced by Ericsson AB.
The book is to be used for training purposes only and it is strictly prohibited to
copy, reproduce, disclose or distribute it in any manner without the express
written consent from Ericsson.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
0
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Objectives
In this module you will learn to:
— Describe features and functions of the ENM Alarm Search application.
— Launch the Alarm Search and access the application’s online help.
— Describe Alarm Search application layout.
— Configure the Alarm Search criteria.
— View and export the Alarm Search results
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Alarm Monitoring Using The ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 22-1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
1
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM CLI Alarm Command Set Overview
› List open alarms
› List historical alarms
› Acknowledge alarms.
› Un-acknowledge alarms
› Comment Alarms
› Enable/Disable Alarm Supervision
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Alarm Monitoring Using The ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 22-2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
2
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM CLI Alarm Command Set
Command
Description
Command Syntax
ack
Acknowledge alarms
"alarm" "ack" <nodeName...> [quick_filter] [filter]
unack
Unacknowledge alarms
"alarm" "unack" <nodeName...> [quick_filter] [filter]
clear
Clear alarms
"clear" <nodeName...> [quick_filter] [filter]
get
Search both the open and
active alarms
"alarm" "get" <nodeName...> [quick_filter] [filter] [options]
hist
Get alarm history
"alarm" "hist" <nodeName...> [quick_filter] [filter] [options]
comment
Add or view comments for
the alarms
alarm" "comment" '"'<comment_value>'"' <nodeName...>
[quick_filter] [filter]
enable
Enable Alarm Supervision
alarm enable scope [quick_filter] [attributes]
disable
Enable Alarm Supervision
Alarm disable scope [quick_filter] [attributes]
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Alarm Monitoring Using The ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 22-3
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
3
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Command Examples - List Alarms
Description
Command
Get all the open alarms for a selected node
alarm get ERBS001
Get the open alarms with selected severities
for the nodes that match a partial node
name
alarm get ERBS* ‐‐critical ‐‐warning
Get the open alarms starting at a selected
date and time for a selected node
alarm get ERBS001 ‐‐begin 2018‐09‐
05T08:00:00
Get history for all alarms for a selected node
alarm hist ERBS001
Get history for the alarms with selected
severities for a selected node
alarm hist ERBS001 ‐‐critical ‐‐warning
Use the online help for the alarm command set for information on
using other command options
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Alarm Monitoring Using The ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 22-4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
4
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Command Examples - Acknowledge and Unacknowledge Alarms
Description
Command
Acknowledge the warning alarms (if any) in
the specified node
alarm ack LTE01ERBS00080 ‐war
Acknowledge the warning alarms (if any) in
the specified node
alarm unack LTE01ERBS00080 ‐war
Un-acknowledge alarms in the specified
node starting from a specific date and time
alarm unack LTE01ERBS00080 ‐b 2017‐06‐29
Acknowledge the alarms with a specific
problem name in the specified node
alarm ack LTE01ERBS00080 ‐‐
specificProblem "Database Space Warning
Level"
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Alarm Monitoring Using The ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 22-5
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
5
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Command Examples – Enable/Disable Alarm
Supervision
Description
Command
Disable Alarm Supervision for a specified
node
alarm disable LTE09ERBS00001
Enable Alarm Supervision for a specified
node
alarm enable LTE09ERBS00001
Disable alarm supervision for multiple nodes
alarm disable
LTE09ERBS00001;LTE09ERBS00002
Disable alarm supervision for a collection
alarm disable MyCollection
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Alarm Monitoring Using The ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 22-6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
6
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Summary
In this module you have learned to:
— Describe features and functions of the ENM Alarm Search application.
— Launch the Alarm Search and access the application’s online help.
— Describe Alarm Search application layout.
— Configure the Alarm Search criteria.
— View and export the Alarm Search results
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Alarm Monitoring Using The ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 22-7
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
7
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
8
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM 19 Operations for
Radio Access Network
ENM CLI Batch and Alias
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM CLI Batch and Alias | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 23-0
DISCLAIMER
This book is a training document and contains simplifications. Therefore, it must
not be considered as a specification of the system. The contents of this
document are subject to revision without notice due to ongoing progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any
error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
This document is not intended to replace the technical documentation that was
shipped with your system. Always refer to that technical documentation during
operation and maintenance.
© Ericsson AB 2019
This document was produced by Ericsson AB.
The book is to be used for training purposes only and it is strictly prohibited to
copy, reproduce, disclose or distribute it in any manner without the express
written consent from Ericsson.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
0
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Objectives
In this module you will learn to:
— Create ENM CLI command aliases
— Create and use batch files in the ENM CLI
— Export ENM CLI results
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM CLI Batch and Alias | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 23-1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
1
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM CLI Exporting and Importing
•
•
To export the result of your command to a
file, use Ctrl + ENTER after the command.
This will download the response as a text file
in your browser, instead of outputting it to
the ENM CM CLI results window.
To Import commands in the ENM CLI, drag
and dropping a batch file inside the browser
window to load the command file into ENM
CM CLI, where it can be later executed.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM CLI Batch and Alias | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 23-2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
2
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
CLI Alias Command
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The ENM CLI can be used to create an alias for a CLI command. This
can be done for any command or command sequence.
The alias is available to all ENM CLI users, not only the creator of the
alias
The alias name can contain any alpha-numeric characters and an
underscore
The alias name must be unique and therefore cannot be named the
same as any existing Command Set
The alias command can take any number of arguments
The alias commands are remembered and can subsequently be
specified in place of the aliased command
Command syntax is case sensitive
Commands with file input cannot be aliased
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM CLI Batch and Alias | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 23-3
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
3
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
“alias” Command Syntax
"alias" '"' ALIAS_NAME { ARGUMENT } '"' '"' COMMAND_CONTEXT
COMMAND_STRING '“'
Where:
— ALIAS_NAME ::= <alias‐name>
— ARGUMENT ::= '$' <argument‐number>
— COMMAND_CONTEXT ::= <command‐set>
— COMMAND_STRING ::= <command‐string>
Description
Command
Alias with no
arguments
alias "ls" "cmedit get * NetworkElement"
Alias with one
argument
alias "cellstate1 $1" "cmedit get $1 EUtranCellFDD.administrativeState ‐
t“
Alias with multiple
arguments
alias "cellstate2 $1 $2" "cmedit get $1
EUtranCellFDD.administrativeState==$2 ‐t"
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM CLI Batch and Alias | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 23-4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
4
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
List “aliases”
List all aliases
cmedit get * CliAlias.* ‐t
Create an alias to list all
aliases
alias "aliases" "cmedit get * CliAlias.* ‐t"
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM CLI Batch and Alias | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 23-5
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
5
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Delete “alias”
Delete a specific alias
cmedit delete * CliAlias.name==<alias name>
CliAlias –t
An Alias can not be edited It must be delete and
recreated if it needs to change
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM CLI Batch and Alias | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 23-6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
6
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
CLI Common Commands: “batch”
•
•
•
The ENM CLI can run commands
in a batch format.
This feature can be used to quickly
and efficiently configure the
managed network with large
volumes of configuration data via
a batch file of CLI commands.
Command Format
"batch execute file:" <file‐name>
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM CLI Batch and Alias | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 23-7
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
7
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
“batch” File Work Flow
Add Batch
file to CLI
Workspace
Create
Batch File
Use a plain text
editor to create
a file with valid
Command Line
Interface CLI
Execute
Batch File
View Results
Drag and Drop
the batch file
onto the CLI
web browser
To execute the
batch file, Use
the command
in the CLI :
Only one file is
allowed to be
dragged and
dropped. If
another file is
dropped into
the browser, it
will override
any previous
file.
batch execute
file:<Batch File
Name>
Results will
show up in the
cli window. Use
.
ctl +Enter to
send them to a
file
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM CLI Batch and Alias | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 23-8
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
8
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
“batch” Command Restrictions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
There is no pre-validation of the batch file. Validation of each individual
command is performed as the batch is being executed.
There is no limit on the number of CLI commands).
The file must be a text file with a one-word name (that is, no spaces).
The batch file must only contain a list of commands from a valid ENM CLI
commandset (for example, any create or config).
It is possible to mix commands from different ENM cli commandsets.
The file must not contain comments or other scripts (for example, PERL,
BASH, PYTHON, and shell script).
If the browser is refreshed / closed or the session times out while batch
execution is running, the execution will stop immediately at that point of
time without rolling back the already executed commands
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM CLI Batch and Alias | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 23-9
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
9
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Controlling “batch” File Execution
Stopping the batch process:
•
•
This will only stop the execution from that point onwards - the commands that
are executed already will not be rolled back by this action.
If the need arises to stop the execution, the user must close / refresh the
browser.
Restarting the batch process:
•
•
If an error / exception occurs, the execution will stop immediately printing out
the file line number (for example the failed command line number) where the
error has occurred. Any command (s) that was successfully executed before this
fail command will not be rolled back.
The user can re-start the batch processing by first fixing the issue with that line
and then removing all previous lines from the file. Also, the user will have to
drag and drop the modified file again before re-starting the process by
repeating the same "batch execute" command.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM CLI Batch and Alias | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 23-10
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
10
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Summary
In this module you have learned to:
— Create ENM CLI command aliases
— Create and use batch files in the ENM CLI
— Export ENM CLI results
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM CLI Batch and Alias | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 23-11
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
11
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
12
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM 19 Operations for
Radio Access Network
Software and Hardware Manager Job
Administation
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Software and Hardware Manager Job Administation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 25-0
DISCLAIMER
This book is a training document and contains simplifications. Therefore, it must
not be considered as a specification of the system. The contents of this
document are subject to revision without notice due to ongoing progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any
error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
This document is not intended to replace the technical documentation that was
shipped with your system. Always refer to that technical documentation during
operation and maintenance.
© Ericsson AB 2019
This document was produced by Ericsson AB.
The book is to be used for training purposes only and it is strictly prohibited to
copy, reproduce, disclose or distribute it in any manner without the express
written consent from Ericsson.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
0
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Objectives
In this module you will learn to:
— Describe the features and functions of the SHM Manager
— Review the types of jobs supported by the Software Hardware Manager
— Launch the SHM Application and access the application’s online help
— View SHM jobs, job details, job logs and node activities for selected jobs
— Filter, cancel, delete, and export SHM jobs
— Use SHM job logs for troubleshooting SHM jobs
— Create a Node Restart Job
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Software and Hardware Manager Job Administation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 25-1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
1
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Launch Software Hardware Manager
— The Software Hardware Manager application link is located in the
“Provisioning” category on the ENM Application Launcher page
— Select the “Software Hardware Manager ” link to launch the
application
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Software and Hardware Manager Job Administation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 25-2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
2
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Software and Hardware Manager Help
1.
2.
Expand the
Help
dropdown
To launch
Software
Hardware
Manager
Help Click on
“App Help.”
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Software and Hardware Manager Job Administation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 25-3
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
3
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
SHM Job Management Page Layout
Action Bar
Job Table
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Software and Hardware Manager Job Administation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 25-4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
4
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
SHM Job Summary Column Descriptions
Column
Description
Job Name
Name of the job provided by user when the job was created.
Job Type
Type of Job, Upgrade, Backup, Restore
Created By
User ID of the user who created the job.
No. of Nodes
Number of Nodes on which the job is to be executed.
Progress
Current “Progress” status of job execution. A 100% progress is displayed only
when all job activities have been executed.
Status
Current level/rank of job execution.
Result
Final outcome of job execution.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Software and Hardware Manager Job Administation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 25-5
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
5
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Job Types
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Software and Hardware Manager Job Administation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 25-6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
6
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
SHM Job Progress
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Software and Hardware Manager Job Administation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 25-7
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
7
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
SHM Job Status
Status
Description
CREATED
Job is created, but the execution has not yet started
SCHEDULED
Job created is scheduled to execute at a specified date and time.
WAIT_FOR_USER_INPUT
Job created is defined for manual execution. To start this job select it in the
Jobs table >Continue.
RUNNING
Job execution is started on at least one node specified in the job.
COMPLETED
Job execution is completed on all the nodes in the job.
CANCELLED
Job execution is cancelled by the user.
SYSTEM_CANCELLED
If an ENM system restore (failover) occurs jobs in CREATED
/ RUNNING/ SCHEDULED/ WAIT_FOR_USER_INPUT are marked as
SYSTEM_CANCELLED by SHM to avoid running the old jobs.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Software and Hardware Manager Job Administation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 25-8
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
8
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
SHM Job Result
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Software and Hardware Manager Job Administation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 25-9
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
9
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
View Job Details
LTE01ERBS00002
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Software and Hardware Manager Job Administation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 25-10
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
10
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
SHM Job Detail Column Descriptions
Column
Description
Node Name
Name of the Node
Current Activity
Current activity being performed.
Progress
Current “Progress” status of job execution.
Status
Current level/rank of job execution.
Result
Final outcome of job execution.
Start Date
Date and time on which job execution started.
End Date
Date and time on which job execution completes.
Created By
User Id of the user who created the job.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Software and Hardware Manager Job Administation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 25-11
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
11
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
View Job Logs
LTE01ERBS00002
› Double click a Job Detail
row to launch “Job Logs.”
› Logs can be exported by
clicking “Export” on the
Action Bar.
› Jobs can be filtered using
the Filter Bar.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Software and Hardware Manager Job Administation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 25-12
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
12
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
SHM Job Log Column Descriptions
Column
Description
Node Name
Name of the Network Element.
Activity
Type of activity performed: Install, backup or Upgrade
Time
Time/date when the log was generated.
Message
Log Message.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Software and Hardware Manager Job Administation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 25-13
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
13
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
SHM Job Log Levels
Log Level
Description
Error
All ERROR logs are displayed
Warning
All ERROR and WARNING logs are displayed
INFO
All ERROR, WARNING and INFO logs are displayed
DEBUG
All ERROR, WARNING, INFO and DEBUG logs are displayed
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Software and Hardware Manager Job Administation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 25-14
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
14
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Export Job Logs
To export Job Logs:
• Select the “Export
Logs” button on
the Action Bar
• A dialog window
will open providing
options to open or
save the export
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Software and Hardware Manager Job Administation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 25-15
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
15
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Cancel Job
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Software and Hardware Manager Job Administation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 25-16
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
16
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Continue Job
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Software and Hardware Manager Job Administation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 25-17
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
17
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Delete Jobs
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Software and Hardware Manager Job Administation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 25-18
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
18
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Summary
In this module you have learned to:
— Describe the features and functions of the SHM Manager
— Review the types of jobs supported by the Software Hardware Manager
— Launch the SHM Application and access the application’s online help
— View SHM jobs, job details, job logs and node activities for selected jobs
— Filter, cancel, delete, and export SHM jobs
— Use SHM job logs for troubleshooting SHM jobs
— Create a Node Restart Job
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Software and Hardware Manager Job Administation | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 25-19
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
19
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
20
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM 19 Operations for
Radio Access Network
Node Backup Administration Using ENM
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Backup Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 26-0
DISCLAIMER
This book is a training document and contains simplifications. Therefore, it must
not be considered as a specification of the system. The contents of this
document are subject to revision without notice due to ongoing progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any
error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
This document is not intended to replace the technical documentation that was
shipped with your system. Always refer to that technical documentation during
operation and maintenance.
© Ericsson AB 2019
This document was produced by Ericsson AB.
The book is to be used for training purposes only and it is strictly prohibited to
copy, reproduce, disclose or distribute it in any manner without the express
written consent from Ericsson.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
0
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Objectives
In this module you will learn to:
— Describe the features and functions of the node Backup Administration in ENM
— List the node types that support the node backup administration features in ENM
— Access the SHM Backup Management feature and access the features' online Help
— Describe and configure the Backup Administration application pages
— View and filter the node backup inventory in SHM
— View node backup details in SHM
— Create, manage, restore and delete node backups in SHM
— Manage backups using the ENM CLI
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Backup Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 26-1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
1
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Node Backup Administration Tasks
Backup Administration allows the operator
perform the following tasks for supported
nodes:
— View Backups on Nodes and ENM
— Create Backups on node
— Upload Backups to ENM
— Delete Backups from ENM or Nodes
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Backup Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 26-2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
2
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Launch Backup Administration
There are two options to launch the Backup Administration page:
1. After launching the SHM page, in the breadcrumb, expand the “Software
Hardware Manager” dropdown and select “Backup Administration
2. On the SHM Job Management page, click on the “Backup Administration”
tab . If any jobs are selected in the SHM job summary table, the tabs will
not be visible.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Backup Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 26-3
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
3
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Access Backup Administration Help
›
›
›
To access the Backup
Administration Help,
launch the Alarm Search
application.
Expand the Help menu in
the upper right corner of
the page.
Select “App Help”.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Backup Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 26-4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
4
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Node Backup Summary Table
The Backup Summary table:
—Lists the backups for the nodes selected in the
topology panel.
—Shows backup details for each backup
—Shows the location of the backups ( ENM or
Node)
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Backup Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 26-5
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
5
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Backup Administration Page Layout
Action Bar
Node
Selection
Backup Table
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Backup Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 26-6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
6
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
View Backup Details
To view the backup details.
› Select a row from Backup Inventory table
› Click on the “Backup Details” button in the action bar.
Backup details will vary depending the type of node.
ERBS
Radio Node
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Backup Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 26-7
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
7
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Node Backup Activities View
Access Path
CPP(L+W RBS)
ECIM(L+W+G Radio Node)
Note: L=LTE,W=WCDMA and G= GSM
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Backup Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 26-8
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
8
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create Backup Job – Overview
— A backup is a combination of software, configuration, and other vital information
stored in a file on the node. A node supports one or more backup types.
— The SHM Create Backup Job functionality allows users to create backup jobs on a
selected node or set of nodes.
— It enables the user to create backup on the node and upload a copy of the backup to
ENM.
— It supports activity configuration per node type.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Backup Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 26-9
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
9
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create Backup Job Steps
The following steps are involved in creating
a Backup Job:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Launch the Create Backup Job Wizard
Enter job details
Select nodes to backup
Select backup Activities
Set backup schedule
View job summary
Verify that backups completed
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Backup Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 26-10
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
10
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create Backup Job
There are three options to launch to Create Backup function
SHM Jobs Page
Action Bar
Backup
Administration
Page Action Bar
Backup Administration
Page Topology
Expand the create a
job drop down and
select “Backup Nodes”
Click on the
“Create Backup
Job: Button
Select the nodes in the
topology, expand the
Actions dropdown and click
on “Create Backup Job”
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Backup Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 26-11
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
11
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Set Backup Job Details
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Backup Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 26-12
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
12
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Select Nodes to backup
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Backup Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 26-13
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
13
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Select Backup Activities
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Backup Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 26-14
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
14
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Set Backup Schedule
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Backup Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 26-15
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
15
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create A Scheduled Backup
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Backup Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 26-16
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
16
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
View Create Backup Summary
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Backup Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 26-17
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
17
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Restore Backup Job Overview
— The Restore Backup function allows the user to restore a backup
that is stored on ENM to a node
— The restore function is only supported for the following node
types:
— Baseband Radio Nodes
— DU Radio Nodes
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Backup Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 26-18
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
18
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Restore Backup Steps
The following steps are involved in creating
a Restore Backup job:
1. Launch the Create Restore Job Wizard
2. Enter Job Details
3. Select Node(s)
4. Select Backup(s)
5. Select Restore Activities
6. Set Restore Schedule
7. View Job Summary
8. Verify Backup is Restored
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Backup Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 26-19
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
19
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create Restore Backup Job
There are three options to launch to Create Restore Backup Wizard
SHM Jobs Page
Action Bar
Expand the create a
job drop down and
select “Restore
Backup”
Backup
Administration
Page Action Bar
Click on the
“Create Restore
Job: Button
Backup Administration
Page Topology
Select the nodes in the
topology, expand the
Actions drop down and
click on “Create Restore
Job”
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Backup Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 26-20
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
20
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Restore Backup Job - Job Details
and Node Selection
›
›
Enter the job name and optional description
Select Add Topology Data to open the Add Network Objects panel. In the Add Network Objects
panel, locate the nodes using Search, Collections or saved searches to add the nodes to restore
backups on.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Backup Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 26-21
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
21
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Restore Backup Job - Select Backups to
Restore
›
›
Select the Backup drop down, next to each node name and choose from the list of backups.
The backup file selected for each node is used to rollback that particular node in the restore job.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Backup Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 26-22
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
22
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Restore Backup Job - Select Restore Activities
›
›
Select the required
restore activities.
Click on the information
icon next to each
activity name to view
the purpose of each
activity
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Backup Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 26-23
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
23
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Restore Backup Job - Set Schedule
› To set the schedule for the Restore Backup Job expand the Start dropdown list.
› Select one of three option to schedule the job
› Individual job activities can be also be scheduled
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Backup Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 26-24
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
24
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Restore Backup Job - View
Summary and Finish
› The Summary section provides a summary of the job details.
› Verify the details and click the “Finish” button to create the job
› Go to the SHM Job Summary page to monitor the job
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Backup Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 26-25
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
25
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Manage Backups Overview
›
›
›
›
The SHM Manage Backups functionality enables the user to perform
activities on backups that have been previously created.
The activities that you perform, depend on the node-type on which
backup was created
ERBS Nodes allow the “Set as Startable” task
ERBS and eNodeB Baseband Radio Nodes allow the “Set as First in
Rollback List” and “Upload to ENM” activities
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Backup Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 26-26
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
26
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create Manage Backup Job
› In the Backup Administration page
› Select a backup in the Backup table
› Click on the “Manage Backups” button on the action bar
› In the Manage Backups window
› Enter a job name
› Select the activities to manage
› Click the “Create” Button
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Backup Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 26-27
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
27
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Backup Housekeeping Overview
— The SHM Backup Housekeeping functionality enables you to define the maximum number of backups
that are retained on the nodes.
— The following activities are supported for each of following node types
— eNodeB DU Radio Nodes
— Rollback list size
— Clear the rollback list and delete all possible CVs
— NodeB Baseband Radio Nodes
— Number of Backups to keep
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Backup Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 26-28
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
28
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create Backup Housekeeping Job Steps
1. Launch the Create Backup Housekeeping
Job Wizard
2. Enter the Job Details
3. Select the Node
4. Select housekeeping activities
5. Set the job Schedule
6. Review the job summary
7. Verify the job completes
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Backup Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 26-29
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
29
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Launch Create Backup Housekeeping Job
Wizard
There are three options to launch to Create Backup Housekeeping Wizard
SHM Jobs Page
Action Bar
Backup Administration
Page Action Bar
Backup Administration
Page Topology
Expand the create
a job drop down
and select “Backup
Housekeeping”
Click on the “Create
Backup Housekeeping
Job” Button
Select the nodes in the
topology, expand the
Actions dropdown and
click on “Create Backup
House Keeping Job”
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Backup Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 26-30
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
30
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create Backup Housekeeping jobs
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Backup Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 26-31
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
31
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create Delete Backup Job
• In the Backup Administration page
• Select on or more backups in the Backup table
• Click on the “Delete” button on the action bar
• In the Manage Backups window
• Enter a job name
• Verify selected the backups are the ones to delete
• Click the “Delete” Button
• User will be redirected to SHM Management page to monitor the job
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Backup Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 26-32
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
32
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Command Examples - Backups
Description
Command
List CVs for selected Node
cmedit get RadioNode01 ConfigurationVersion.*
Create a backup on the node
shm backup ‐n RadioNode01 ‐bn CliBackupTest01
Create a backup on the node
with and upload to ENM
shm backup ‐n RadioNode01 ‐bn CliBackupTest24 ‐u
Use the online help for the shm and cmedit command sets for
information on using other command options
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Backup Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 26-33
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
33
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Summary
In this module you have learned to:
— Describe the features and functions of the node Backup Administration in ENM
— List the node types that support the node backup administration features in ENM
— Access the SHM Backup Management feature and access the features' online Help
— Describe and configure the Backup Administration application pages
— View and filter the node backup inventory in SHM
— View node backup details in SHM
— Create, manage, restore and delete node backups in SHM
— Manage backups using the ENM CLI
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Backup Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 26-34
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
34
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
35
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM 19 Operations for
Radio Access Network
Node Hardware Administration Using ENM
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Hardware Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 27-0
DISCLAIMER
This book is a training document and contains simplifications. Therefore, it must
not be considered as a specification of the system. The contents of this
document are subject to revision without notice due to ongoing progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any
error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
This document is not intended to replace the technical documentation that was
shipped with your system. Always refer to that technical documentation during
operation and maintenance.
© Ericsson AB 2019
This document was produced by Ericsson AB.
The book is to be used for training purposes only and it is strictly prohibited to
copy, reproduce, disclose or distribute it in any manner without the express
written consent from Ericsson.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
0
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Objectives
In this module you will learn to:
— Describe the features and functions of Hardware Administration in the SHM application
— Access the SHM Hardware Administration feature and access the features' online Help
— Describe and configure the Hardware Inventory Management application pages
— View, filter and export the node hardware information
— Use the ENM CLI to view node hardware information
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Hardware Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 27-1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
1
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Hardware Administration Overview
— SHM provides hardware inventory
information about sub-rack(s) and Plug-in
Units (PIU) for the supported nodes from
the list of nodes in application’s topology
— Hardware information can be exported
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Hardware Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 27-2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
2
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Launch Hardware Administration
There are two options to launch the Hardware Administration page:
1.
After launching the SHM page, in the breadcrumb, expand the “Software Hardware
Manager” dropdown and select “Hardware Administration
2.
On the SHM Job Management page, click on the “Hardware Administration” tab . If
any jobs are selected in the SHM job summary table, the tabs will not be visible.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Hardware Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 27-3
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
3
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Access Hardware Administration Help
• To access the Hardware
Administration Help, launch
the Alarm Search
application.
• Expand the Help menu in
the upper right corner of
the page.
• Select “App Help”.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Hardware Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 27-4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
4
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Hardware Administration Configuration
— If no nodes are displayed in the application topology, add nodes from the “Add
Topology Data” dropdown list.
— To Configure the table settings, select the gear icon to add, remove, or reorder table
columns.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Hardware Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 27-5
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
5
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
View Hardware Item(s) for Selected Hardware
Hardware items for selected hardware can be
viewed in the following three ways:
1. After selecting the sub-rack(s), click on the
“View Hardware Items” from the action bar,
the hardware items for selected sub-rack(s)
are displayed in the “Hardware Items” table.
2. Double-clicking on a particular hardware row
to see the hardware items.
3. Select the sub-racks from the table, rightclick and select “View Hardware Items” from
the dropdown list to see the hardware items.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Hardware Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 27-6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
6
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
View Hardware Items
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Hardware Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 27-7
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
7
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Filter and Compare Hardware
Select multiple nodes of same type and click “View Hardware Items”
Filter by columns ( Product Name and/or Revision)
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Hardware Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 27-8
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
8
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Export Hardware Items
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select Rows to export from the hardware items table
Click on the Export Button on the action bar
A new window will be opened, indicating the export is in progress
After the export is complete, a message will appear to allow the user to save
the export or open in the export data in Excel
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Hardware Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 27-9
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
9
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Export Hardware Information using CLI
1. Export Hardware
2. Check export job status
3. Download Export Hardware 3GPP XML File ( file is zipped)
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Hardware Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 27-10
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
10
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Summary
In this module you have learned to:
— Describe the features and functions of Hardware Administration in the SHM application
— Access the SHM Hardware Administration feature and access the features' online Help
— Describe and configure the Hardware Inventory Management application pages
— View, filter and export the node hardware information
— Use the ENM CLI to view node hardware information
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Hardware Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 27-11
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
11
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
12
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM 19 Operations for
Radio Access Network
Node License Administration Using ENM
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node License Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 28-0
DISCLAIMER
This book is a training document and contains simplifications. Therefore, it must
not be considered as a specification of the system. The contents of this
document are subject to revision without notice due to ongoing progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any
error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
This document is not intended to replace the technical documentation that was
shipped with your system. Always refer to that technical documentation during
operation and maintenance.
© Ericsson AB 2019
This document was produced by Ericsson AB.
The book is to be used for training purposes only and it is strictly prohibited to
copy, reproduce, disclose or distribute it in any manner without the express
written consent from Ericsson.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
0
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Objectives
In this module you will learn to:
— Describe features and functions of the License Administration in ENM
— Access the SHM License Administration feature and access the features' online Help
— Describe and configure the License Administration application
— View, filter and export License Key features and capacities using SHM
— Describe the process to import, install and delete Node License Keys Files using SHM
— View the status of node’s License features and capacities using the Topology Browser and ENM CLI
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node License Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 28-1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
1
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
License Administration Overview
› Displays a License Inventory summary of the licenses active on the node.
This includes fingerprint, sequence number and installation date.
› Provides detailed information on each feature and capacity license.
› License Administration is only supported for nodes requiring License Key
Files (LKF) Files.
› The following operations can be performed:
› View features and capacity keys in the licenses
› Import new licenses
› View imported licenses
› Install licenses
› View and Manage license status and states using the Topology Browser
and the ENM CLI.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node License Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 28-2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
2
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
License Overview
› LKF (License Key File) is delivered from a license centre
› LKF file format is .zip archive for an ERBS node
› .zip archive contains 2 XML files, info and license
› Info file specifies license description & validity period info
› Each LKF is generated for specific fingerprint unique to each ERBS node
› License categories are : CAPACITY or FEATURE
› License Keys are stored in the SMRS repository :
/home/smrs/smrsroot/license/
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node License Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 28-3
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
3
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Launch License Administration
There are two options to launch the License Administration page:
1.
After launching the SHM page, in the breadcrumb, expand the “Software Hardware
Manager” dropdown and select “License Administration”
2.
On the SHM Job Management page, click on the “License Administration” tab . If any
jobs are selected in the SHM job summary table, the tabs will not be visible.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node License Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 28-4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
4
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Access License Administration Help
• To access the License
Administration Help, launch
the Alarm Search
application.
• Expand the Help menu in
the upper right corner of
the page.
• Select “App Help”.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node License Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 28-5
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
5
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
License Administration Configuration
— Add or remove nodes with the “Add Topology Data” dropdown list
— Select the gear icon to add, remove, or reorder table properties
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node License Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 28-6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
6
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
View License Key
•
•
•
License key summaries are displayed when nodes are selected in the
“Topology” panel.
The License Inventory shows a summary of the licenses active on the
nodes.
The license Inventory can be filtered using the filter bar under the column
headings
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node License Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 28-7
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
7
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
License Key Summary Properties
Column Name
Column Description
Node Name
Name of the network element.
Fingerprint
Unique value for the license key specific to nodes.
Hardware Resource Name
Hardware resource name for a software key.
Sequence Number
The sequence number from the currently installed license key file is stored
in the node in the parameter file. A new license key file can be installed only
if it contains a sequence number equal to or higher than the one specified in
the old license key file.
Installation Date
Date on which the license is installed.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node License Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 28-8
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
8
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Launch License Key Features and Capacities
Page
License Key features and capacities can be
viewed in the following three ways:
1. Selecting one or more the License
File(s) in the License Key Summary
table and then click on the “View
License Keys” button in the action bar.
2. Double-clicking on a row in the License
Key Summary table
3. Right-click on a row in the License Key
Summary table and select “View
License Keys”
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node License Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 28-9
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
9
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
View License Key Features and Capacities
Properties
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node License Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 28-10
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
10
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
License Key Properties
Column Name
Column Description
Node Name
Name of the network element.
License Key Type
Feature Keys enable features and functionality on a node.
Capacity Keys enable increased node capacity for handling traffic and event volumes
Key ID
A feature key the identifies a certain feature in the application and contains
information to control the usage of that feature.
Capacity Limit
Indicates the limit which is allowed (or sold).
Hard Limit
Indicates the level which is not possible to be exceeded.
Expiry Date
Date on which the license key will expire.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node License Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 28-11
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
11
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Export License Key Properties
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select Rows to export from the License Key table
Click on the Export Button on the action bar
A new window will be opened, indicating the export is in progress
After the export is complete, a message will appear to allow the user to save the export or
open in the export data in Excel
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node License Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 28-12
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
12
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
View Imported Key Files
•
•
The Imported Key File tables contains a list of key files that have been
imported into ENM.
To view Imported Key files, click on the “View Imported Key Files” button on
the License Administration action bar.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node License Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 28-13
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
13
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Import License Key File Overview
— License Key files are imported from the user’s computer file system
— Import status is provided to monitor the import process.
— One or more License Key files may be imported with the import wizard
— Users must have the ENM shm_Administrator or shm_Operator user
role to import key files.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node License Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 28-14
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
14
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Launch Import License Key File Wizard
On the License Administration page, click the “Import Key Files” button on the
action bar to launch the Import License Key File Wizard.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node License Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 28-15
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
15
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Import License Key Files
1. Launch Import Key File Wizard
3. Import Key Files
4. Monitor Key File Import
2. Select Key Files to Import
5. Verify Key Import
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node License Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 28-16
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
16
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Install License Key File Overview
— Before installing License Key files they must first be imported into ENM
— One or more License Key files may be installed with the import wizard.
— Installation status can be monitored in the SHM Job Summary page.
— Users must have the ENM shm_Administrator or shm_Operator user role to install key files.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node License Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 28-17
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
17
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Install Key File Steps
1. Launch the Install Key Files Job
Wizard
2. Enter Job Details
3. Select Node(s)
4. Select License Key File for node
5. Validate Installation is possible
6. Set Install Schedule
7. View Job Summary
8. Create Job
9. Monitor Job
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node License Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 28-18
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
18
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Launch Install License Key File Wizard
The Install License Key File application can be launched in the following
three ways:
› On SHM Jobs Summary page, click on the “Create a Job” drop-down list from the action
bar and select “Install License Keys”.
› On the License Administration page, click “Install Key Files” from the action bar.
› On License Administration page, select the network elements in the topology panel, click
the “Actions” drop-down list and select “Install Key Files”. This will open the Install License
Key Files Wizard with the selected nodes added.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node License Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 28-19
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
19
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Install License Key Files
Job Details and Node Selection:
1. Enter a job name and description of the job and select the nodes on which the
license is to be installed.
2. Select License Key Files: The Add Nodes section is preconfigured with the LKF files
hat have been imported in and the associated nodes on which they can be installed
Validation:
1. Selected license files are validated on selected node(s) to make sure the files can be
installed
Set Schedule:
1. Choose one of the three types of schedule: manual, immediate, or date and time.
2. Finish:
3. View a summary of the selected nodes and license files.
4. Click “Finish” to start the installing the license files jobs or to navigate to other
pages in order to edit the configuration.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node License Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 28-20
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
20
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Delete License Keys
1.
2.
3.
Select View Imported Key Files in the License
Administration action bar
In the Imported Key Files table select the key files to
delete
Click on the “Delete” button the action bar.
Note: Multiple LKFs can be selected and deleted
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node License Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 28-21
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
21
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
View License Information in Topology Browser
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node License Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 28-22
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
22
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
View License Properties Using ENM CLI
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node License Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 28-23
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
23
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Export License Information using CLI
1. Export License Information
2. Check export job status
3. Download Export License 3GPP XML File ( file is zipped)
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node License Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 28-24
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
24
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Summary
In this module you have learned to:
— Describe features and functions of the License Administration in ENM
— Access the SHM License Administration feature and access the features' online Help
— Describe and configure the License Administration application
— View, filter and export License Key features and capacities using SHM
— Describe the process to import, install and delete Node License Keys Files using SHM
— View the status of node’s License features and capacities using the Topology Browser and ENM CLI
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node License Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 28-25
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
25
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
26
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM 19 Operations for
Radio Access Network
Node Software Administration Using ENM
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Software Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 29-0
DISCLAIMER
This book is a training document and contains simplifications. Therefore, it must
not be considered as a specification of the system. The contents of this
document are subject to revision without notice due to ongoing progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any
error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
This document is not intended to replace the technical documentation that was
shipped with your system. Always refer to that technical documentation during
operation and maintenance.
© Ericsson AB 2019
This document was produced by Ericsson AB.
The book is to be used for training purposes only and it is strictly prohibited to
copy, reproduce, disclose or distribute it in any manner without the express
written consent from Ericsson.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
0
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Objectives
In this module you will learn to:
— Describe the features and functions of Software Administration in the SHM application
— Launch the SHM Software Administration feature and access the features' online Help
— Describe and configure the SHM Software Administration page layout
— View the installed software on selected nodes using SHM
— Import and view available software packages in ENM
— Describe the process to import software and perform node upgrades using SHM
— Describe the ENM CLI commands available to manage node software
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Software Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 29-1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
1
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Software Management Support Tools in ENM
Application
View Installed
Software
Import
Software
Package
Upgrade
Node
Software Hardware
Manager (SHM)
X
X
X
ENM CLI
X
X
Element Manager – for
supported Nodes
X
AMOS – for supported
Nodes
X
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Software Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 29-2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
2
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Launch Software Administration
There are two options to launch the Software Administration page:
1. After launching the SHM page, in the breadcrumb, expand the “Software
Hardware Manager” dropdown list and select “Software Administration
2. On the SHM Job Management page, click on the “ Software
Administration” tab . If any jobs are selected in the SHM job summary
table, the tabs will not be visible.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Software Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 29-3
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
3
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Access Software Administration Help
• To access the Software
Administration Help, launch
the Alarm Search
application.
• Expand the Help menu in
the upper right corner of
the page.
• Select “App Help”.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Software Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 29-4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
4
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Software Administration Configuration
— If no nodes are displayed in the application topology, add nodes from the “Add
Topology Data” dropdown list.
— To Configure the table settings, select the gear icon to add, remove, or reorder table
columns.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Software Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 29-5
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
5
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Software Administration Page Layout
Action Bar
Software
Table
Topology
Tree
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Software Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 29-6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
6
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
View Software Versions - LTE
•
The Software Version page provides details on the software packages located on
the supported nodes.
•
The software version information can be filtered and exported.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Software Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 29-7
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
7
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
View Software Versions – WCDMA
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Software Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 29-8
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
8
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
View Software Versions – GSM
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Software Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 29-9
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
9
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Software Version Table Properties
Column
Node Name
Description
Name of the network element.
Name
Product name of the software version.
Product Number
Product number of the software version.
Revision
Product revision of the software version.
Type
Category of software item such as upgrade package (UP)
Node Type
The node type of the node.
Production Date
Software production date
State
Process state of the software version
Active
Indicates whether the specified software version is currently in use by the node.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Software Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 29-10
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
10
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
View Software Items - LTE
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Software Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 29-11
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
11
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
View Software Items - WCDMA
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Software Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 29-12
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
12
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
View Software Items - GSM
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Software Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 29-13
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
13
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Node Software Upgrade Workflow Using SHM
SHM Software Administration
Import
Import the Software
Package into ENM
Create Job
Execute Job
Verify
Create an Upgrade
Job
Execute the Upgrade
Job (immediate or
scheduled)
Verify Job is
completed and node is
operational
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Software Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 29-14
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
14
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
View the Imported Software Packages
•
•
•
The Software Packages page shows the list of software packages that have been
imported into ENM and are available for installation.
In the Software Administration page action bar, select View Software Packages to
launch the Imported Software Packages page
To delete a Software package from ENM, select the package and click on Delete in
action bar.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Software Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 29-15
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
15
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Import Software Packages - Step 1
On the Software Administration page, click “Import Software Package” in the action bar
to launch the Import Software Package Wizard.
Click ”Select” to open the file browser to select a software package to import.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Software Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 29-16
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
16
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Import Software Packages - Step 2
Select the software package from file window. Only .zip, .tar, .Z, and .gz file formats are supported
Click Import Package to import the package.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Software Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 29-17
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
17
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Import Software Packages - Step 3
Monitor the upload status
A success message is displayed once the file is uploaded
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Software Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 29-18
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
18
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Launch Create Upgrade Job Wizard
There are three options to launch the Create Upgrade Job Wizard
SHM Jobs Page
Action Bar
Software
Administration
Page Action Bar
Software Administration
Page Topology
Expand the create a
job drop down and
select “Upgrade
Nodes”
Click on the
“Create Upgrade
Job” Button
Select the nodes in the
topology, expand the
Actions dropdown and click
on “Create Upgrade Job”
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Software Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 29-19
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
19
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create Upgrade Job - Add Job Details and
Select Nodes
•
•
•
•
Enter the job name and
optional description
Select Add Topology
Data to open the Add
Network Objects panel.
In the Add Network
Objects panel, locate the
nodes using Topology,
Search, Collections or
Saved searches to add
the nodes to Upgrade
If the Wizard was
launched using the
Topology in the
Software Administration
page, the nodes will
already be added
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Software Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 29-20
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
20
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create Upgrade Job - Select Software Package
•
•
•
Select the software package to install from the software package dropdown list.
Software packages must already be imported to show up in the list
The node types list will depend on type nodes selected when the nodes were added
in the previous step.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Software Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 29-21
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
21
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create Upgrade Job - Validate Upgrade (1 of 2)
1. The Validation page displays
a list of nodes and packages
for performing upgrade
validations
2. The validation verifies that
the current software on the
node can be upgraded.
3. Click “Validate” to perform
validation or check the “Skip
Validation” box to skip all
validations.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Software Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 29-22
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
22
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create Upgrade Job - Validate Upgrade (2 of 2)
•
•
•
•
•
Upgrade validation compares the software package selected for installation
against the software package which is active on the node.
No additional checks are performed.
A red X icon indicates the software package can not be installed
A green check icon indicates the software package can be installed
A yellow triangle icon indicates software package is already installed on
the node.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Software Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 29-23
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
23
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create Upgrade Job Upgrade - Select Activities
› Select the activities to perform
during the upgrade job – At least one
activity must be selected.
› The activities must be executed in
sequence.
› The following activity execution
options are available:
› Immediate: activity will start
immediately.
› Manual: activity will start after
user confirmation.
› Step by Step: The selected
activities will run step by step.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Software Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 29-24
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
24
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create Upgrade Job – Set Job Schedule
•
To schedule the upgrade job select one of
schedule options below:
› Define job and execute immediately: Executes the job immediately.
› Define job and schedule execution: Executes the job at a specified time.
› Define job and execute later: Executes the job after user confirmation in SHM
Note: Selected time will be ENM Server Time Zone.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Software Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 29-25
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
25
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create Upgrade Job - Check Job Summary
and Finish
› Verify the job configuration
› Click on “Finish” to create the job
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Software Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 29-26
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
26
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Verify Upgrade Job Completion
› Verify status of the upgrade job on the main SHM Job Summary page.
› If the job failed, view the job logs to troubleshoot the job
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Software Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 29-27
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
27
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Export Node Software Inventory using CLI
1. Export Node Software Inventory
2. Check export job status
3. Download Export Software 3GPP XML File ( file is zipped)
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Software Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 29-28
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
28
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Summary
In this module you have learned to:
— Describe the features and functions of Software Administration in the SHM application
— Launch the SHM Software Administration feature and access the features' online Help
— Describe and configure the SHM Software Administration page layout
— View the installed software on selected nodes using SHM
— Import and view available software packages in ENM
— Describe the process to import software and perform node upgrades using SHM
— Describe the ENM CLI commands available to manage node software
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Software Administration Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 29-29
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
29
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
30
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM 19 Operations for
Radio Access Network
Managing Statistical Based Subscriptions Using
ENM
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Statistical Based Subscriptions Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 31-0
DISCLAIMER
This book is a training document and contains simplifications. Therefore, it must
not be considered as a specification of the system. The contents of this
document are subject to revision without notice due to ongoing progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any
error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
This document is not intended to replace the technical documentation that was
shipped with your system. Always refer to that technical documentation during
operation and maintenance.
© Ericsson AB 2019
This document was produced by Ericsson AB.
The book is to be used for training purposes only and it is strictly prohibited to
copy, reproduce, disclose or distribute it in any manner without the express
written consent from Ericsson.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
0
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Objectives
In this module you will learn to:
— List the types of Statistical Subscriptions supported by ENM
— Describe features and functions of the PMIC application
— Launch the PMIC application and access the application’s online help
— Describe the PMIC application page layout
— View and analyze the PMIC subscription dashboard
— Review the common and specific steps for creating different types of Statistics Based Subscriptions in PMIC
— View, Create, modify, and delete Statistics Based Subscriptions Profiles
— Activate and Deactivate Subscription Profiles
— View Statistics Based Performance data using the ENM CLI
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Statistical Based Subscriptions Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 31-1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
1
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Initiation of Statistics Collection
Subscription Profiles
ENM
• Pre Defined
To collect counters required for the
predefined reports.
• User Defined
Created by a user to collect counters not
contained in the predefined profile.
Performance Monitorings (PMs)
(also called ‘scanners’)
• System Defined
Created by the System Defined
Subscription Profile (Primary for ENodeB)
Stats.xml.gz
• User Defined
Created by the User Defined Subscription
Profile
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Statistical Based Subscriptions Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 31-2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
2
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Statistics Based Subscriptions Overview (1 of 1)
• Standard Statistical Subscriptions are
used to Initiate statistical counters
defined on LTE, WCDMA, Core and
Transport network nodes
• MO Instance Subscriptions are
created by selecting the statistical
counters from specific MO Classes or
the instances of selected MO Classes
(MOCs)
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Statistical Based Subscriptions Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 31-3
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
3
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Statistics Based Subscriptions Overview (2 of 2)
System Defined Statistical Subscriptions
• Are created when nodes of the supported type are added
to ENM when it’s PMFunction is enabled
• Are deleted when the PMFunction is disabled on all nodes
of the supported node types.
• Creation/deletion and addition/removal of nodes in the
subscription is done by a periodic audit.
• Inactive System Defined Statistical Subscriptions can be
edited to set schedule parameters and to view the list of
nodes
• Users cannot create or delete System Defined
Subscriptions.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Statistical Based Subscriptions Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 31-4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
4
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
PM Initiation and Collection (PMIC) Overview
— Initiates the output of counters and events in the
network nodes.
— Collects and manages the Performance Management
(PM) files from the nodes.
— Supports two main types of subscriptions
— Statistics-based subscriptions
Used to continually collect stats to provide data to
external PM reporting systems
— Event-based subscriptions
Used for network troubleshooting and are typically run
as needed
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Statistical Based Subscriptions Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 31-5
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
5
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Launch PM Initiation and Collection (PMIC)
— The PM Initiation and Collection (PMIC) application link is located in
the “Performance and Optimization” category on the ENM Application
Launcher page
— Select the “PM Initiation and Collection (PMIC) ” link to launch the
application
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Statistical Based Subscriptions Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 31-6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
6
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Access PMIC Help
• To access the PMIC Help,
launch the Alarm Search
application.
• Expand the Help menu in
the upper right corner of
the page.
• Select “App Help”.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Statistical Based Subscriptions Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 31-7
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
7
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
PMIC Application Page Layout
Action Bar
Dash Board
Subscription
Table
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Statistical Based Subscriptions Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 31-8
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
8
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Subscriptions Table
— The Subscriptions Table provides a summary of the defined PM subscriptions
— A colored bar on left side of the table indicates the state of the subscription. Green
indicates the subscription is okay and red indicates the subscription has an error
— Subscriptions can be filtered using the table filter bar
— Table Properties can configured using the gear icon to open the table settings
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Statistical Based Subscriptions Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 31-9
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
9
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Subscriptions Table Properties
Column
Subscription Name
Description
Name of the subscription
Description
Brief description of the subscription.
Type
Type of the subscription.
No of Nodes
Number of nodes assigned to the subscription
Created By
The username of the user that created the subscription.
Status
The state of a subscription.
Trace Reference
Identifier for a UE trace subscription.
Last Activation Time
Time the subscription was last activated
Scheduled At
The time a scheduled subscription will run
ROP Interval
Subscription’s Reporting Output Period
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Statistical Based Subscriptions Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 31-10
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
10
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
PMIC Actions
Action
Description
View Subscription
Allows viewing of subscription details.
Edit Subscription
Allows editing of subscription details.
Duplicate Subscription
Duplicates the selected subscription. Opens the edit page to allow further
changes to the existing content.
Activate Subscription
Activates the subscription. Scanner activation notifications will be sent to
all the nodes on the subscription.
Deactivate Subscription
Deactivates the subscription. Scanner deactivation notifications will be
sent to all nodes on the subscription.
Delete Subscription
Deletes the subscription.
View PM Node Processes
Opens the PM Node Processes page containing only the processes for the
selected subscription.
View Subscription Logs
Opens the Subscription Logs page for the selected subscription. By
default, it only shows logs older by four (4) hours from current time. To
view the entire log, clear the “Start time” field and click “Search”.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Statistical Based Subscriptions Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 31-11
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
11
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Subscription States
Subscription State
Active
State Description
Subscription Activation has completed
Deactivating
Subscription is in the deactivation process.
Updating
Nodes have been added to or removed from an
active subscription and are being processed.
Inactive
Subscription is created and published by user.
Activating
Subscription is in the activation process.
Scheduled
Subscription is scheduled to be activated in the
future.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Statistical Based Subscriptions Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 31-12
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
12
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
PMIC Dashboard - Subscription Admin Status
— Displays the status of the
subscriptions.
— A subscription may be in
any one of six possible
states
— Each subscription state has
a count included, showing
the number of
subscriptions in each state
at any one time.
— The total number of
subscriptions is also
displayed.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Statistical Based Subscriptions Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 31-13
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
13
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
PMIC Dashboard - Active Operational Status
›
Shows the total number of
active subscriptions.
›
Displays in red the number of
active subscriptions that are
in error.
›
Displays in green the number
of active subscriptions that
are operating.
›
Clicking the active
operational doughnut chart
will open the PM Node
Processes page with the list
of subscriptions and nodes
sorted by error.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Statistical Based Subscriptions Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 31-14
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
14
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
PMIC Dashboard - Data Rate Per Minute Chart
›
Provides a visual
representation of file collection
during the last 60 minutes. This
includes both normal file
collection and file recovery.
›
The graph represents a live
feed which automatically gets
updated every minute and no
page refresh is required to view
the latest data.
›
The image shows units in KB,
but the units are dynamic and
could be in any of the possible
values (Bytes, KB, MB, GB, TB,
or PB).
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Statistical Based Subscriptions Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 31-15
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
15
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
PMIC Dashboard - Files Missed Per Minute
Chart
›
Provides a visual representation
of the number of files missed
during collection in the last 60
minutes. This includes both
normal file collection and file
recovery.
›
Clicking the graph will open a
log viewer showing all the errors
in relation to missed files for the
last 60 minutes.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Statistical Based Subscriptions Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 31-16
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
16
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create Statistical Subscription - Details
› Enter the mandatory subscription name
› Enter the optional subscription description if desired
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Statistical Based Subscriptions Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 31-17
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
17
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create Statistical Subscription – Add Resources
— To add nodes to the subscription, click on the Add Recourses tab
— Click on the Add Topology Data button and Select nodes from scoping panel
— After node selection is made, click “Add” to add the nodes to the subscription
— The added nodes will show their current PMFunction status
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Statistical Based Subscriptions Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 31-18
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
18
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Criteria Based Subscriptions (CBS)
— A Criteria Based Subscription (CBS) is a subscription with a dynamic
nodes list which is populated by a criteria.
— The criteria used in a CBS is a Saved Search which the user can import
from the Network Explorer Application.
— The criteria is dynamic because the criteria is audited periodically and if
there are any changes in the result set of the criteria, these changes are
applied to the subscription.
— The default audit period is 15 minutes, and is configurable by the
System Administrator.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Statistical Based Subscriptions Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 31-19
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
19
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create Statistical Subscription – Add Resources
– Criteria Based
— To add nodes to the subscription, click on the Add Recourses tab
— Select Criteria Based Subscription On
— Click on the Add Topology Data button and Select nodes from Saved Searches in scoping
panel
— After node selection is made, click “Add” to add the nodes to the subscription
— The added nodes will show their current PMFunction status
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Statistical Based Subscriptions Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 31-20
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
20
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create Statistical Subscription - Add Counters
— The counters tab is
divided into two panes:
the left pane contains
available counters and
the right pane contains
currently included
counters.
— Select the counters to
include in the
subscription from the
available counters
— Click the right arrow icon
to move the selected
counters to the “Counters
to be Included”
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Statistical Based Subscriptions Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 31-21
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
21
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create Statistical Subscription - Schedule
— Select the date
and time for the
Subscription
activation to
start and end
— The default start
time is “Time of
Activation”
— The default end
time is “No End
Date”
—
The dates and
times displayed
are in the ENM
server time zone
— Click on the
“Save” button to
create the
Subscription.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Statistical Based Subscriptions Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 31-22
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
22
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Activate and Deactivate Statistical
Subscriptions
›
To Activate a Subscription:
—Select an Inactive Subscription in the Subscription List.
—Click on the “Activate” button in the action bar
—The subscription status will change as follows:
—Inactive > Activating > Active
—If the subscription cannot be activated for any reason, the status will change to "Active" and the vertical
bar will display a red highlight beside the subscription name.
—If the subscription has counter conflicts, the user would get a warning message and can choose either
“Continue Activating the Subscription”, “Edit the Subscription”, or “Cancel.”
›
To Deactivate a Subscription:
—Select an active Subscription in the Subscription List.
—Click on the “Deactivate” button in the action bar
—The subscription status will change as follows:
—Active > Deactivating > Inactive
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Statistical Based Subscriptions Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 31-23
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
23
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
PM File Collection and Storage
›
›
The location and the retention period of the collected performance files is
configurable by the system administrator
All PM Data files are stored on the PMIC NFS Share, the default locations
are:
›
›
/ericsson/pmic1/XML
/ericsson/pmic2/XML
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Statistical Based Subscriptions Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 31-24
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
24
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
PM CLI Functions
—Check nodes PM Function
status
—Enable / Disable the node
PMFunction
—Describe Node PM
counters
—View Node PM counter
values
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Statistical Based Subscriptions Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 31-25
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
25
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Node PmFunction
— The Node PmFunction is used to switch on and off PMIC Mediation
flows for each node.
— If PmFunction is on, all file collection, subscription activation,
subscription deactivation, scanner polling and scanner master
functionality is available for the node
— If PmFunction is off, the functionality listed above not available for
Node
— The PmFunction can be checked, enabled and disabled using the ENM
CLI
— Only a user with administrator privilege can set the PmFunction on or
off.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Statistical Based Subscriptions Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 31-26
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
26
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Check and Set PMFunction using ENM CLI
— To check the status of the PM function on a node use the command
cmedit get <NODE NAME> pmFunction.pmEnabled
— To enable the PM function on node use the command
cmedit set NetworkElement=<NODENAME>,PmFunction=1 pmEnabled=True
— To disable the PM function on node use the command
cmedit set NetworkElement=<NODENAME>,PmFunction=1 pmEnabled=False
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Statistical Based Subscriptions Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 31-27
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
27
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
View Performance Counters Using ENM CLI
— cmedit get LTE01ERBS00001 ENodeBFunction.<pm>
FDN : MeContext=LTE01ERBS00001,ManagedElement=1,
ENodeBFunction=1
pmLicConnectedUsersTimeCong : 0
pmLicDlCapLicense : 0
pmLicUlCapLicense : 0
pmLicDlPrbCapLicense : 0
pmLicUlPrbCapLicense : 0
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Statistical Based Subscriptions Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 31-28
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
28
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Summary
In this module you have learned to:
— List the types of Statistical Subscriptions supported by ENM
— Describe features and functions of the PMIC application
— Launch the PMIC application and access the application’s online help
— Describe the PMIC application page layout
— View and analyze the PMIC subscription dashboard
— Review the common and specific steps for creating different types of Statistics Based Subscriptions in PMIC
— View, Create, modify, and delete Statistics Based Subscriptions Profiles
— Activate and Deactivate Subscription Profiles
— View Statistics Based Performance data using the ENM CLI
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Statistical Based Subscriptions Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 31-29
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
29
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
30
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM 19 Operations for
Radio Access Network
Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-0
DISCLAIMER
This book is a training document and contains simplifications. Therefore, it must
not be considered as a specification of the system. The contents of this
document are subject to revision without notice due to ongoing progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any
error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
This document is not intended to replace the technical documentation that was
shipped with your system. Always refer to that technical documentation during
operation and maintenance.
© Ericsson AB 2019
This document was produced by Ericsson AB.
The book is to be used for training purposes only and it is strictly prohibited to
copy, reproduce, disclose or distribute it in any manner without the express
written consent from Ericsson.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
0
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Objectives
In this module you will learn to:
— Describe the features for managing Event Based Subscriptions in PMIC
— List the type of nodes supported for Event Based Subscriptions in ENM
— Review the common steps for creating a Event Based Subscriptions
— Describe the specific steps for creating different types of Event Based Subscriptions
— Access ENM documentation on how to decode and view the Event Based Subscription results
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
1
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Event Based Statistics Overview
— Event Based Statistics are used to collect event data from network nodes
for monitoring network performance and for troubleshooting
— To Create a Subscription the user must have one of following ENM User
Roles:
— PM_Operator
— PM_Topology_Operator
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
2
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Events based subscription - LTE
Cell Trace / Events Based Statistics-L (EBS-L) Contains a
set of events or a set of EBS-L counters, or both and nodes on
which the events can be activated.
User Equipment Trace (UE Trace) Contains UE Details (IMSI,
IMEI or IMEI Software Version), which are mandatory at
configuration, Trace Depth and interface.
Continuous Cell Trace (CCTR) Is a System defined
subscription which is applied to all LTE nodes managed by
ENM.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-3
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
3
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Events based subscription - LTE
Events based Monitoring (EBM) and Events Based
Statistics-MME (EBS-M) Contains a set of EBM events, a set
of EBS-M counters, or both and the nodes on which they can
be activated. MME only
Cell Trace UE ID Mapping (CTUM) Is a System defined and
used to map eNodeB cell trace events with permanent UE ID
IMEI / IMSI. Created when first SGSN-MME is added to ENM
and is in an Inactive state . SGSN-MME only
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
4
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Events based subscription-WCDMA
General Performance Event Handling (GPEH) contains a set
of cells per node, a set of events, and nodes in which they can
be activated.
Cell Traffic Recording (CTR) contains a set of events, one
trigger event, one cell name per node, and nodes in which
they can be activated.
User Equipment Traffic Recording (UETR) contains UE
details (IMSI), events, and nodes on which to trace.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-5
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
5
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Event Based Subscription Support
Trace Types
Network
Type
Supported Nodes
Continuous Cell Trace
(CCTR)
LTE
RadioNode
Cell Trace UE ID Mapping
(CTUM)
Core
SGSN-MME
Cell Trace / EBS-L
LTE
eNodeB DU/Baseband Radio Node eNodeB
Pico Radio Node
UE Trace
LTE
eNodeB DU/Baseband Radio Node
eNodeB Pico Radio Node
EBM / EBS-M
LTE
SGSN-MME
Cell Traffic Recording (CTR)
WCDMA
RNC
General Performance
Events Handling (GPEH)
WCDMA
RNC/RBS
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
6
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Common steps for Creating Event Based
Subscriptions
1. Launch PMIC Application
2. Select the “Create a Trace” from the
PMIC Action Bar
3. Enter Subscription Details
4. Add Resources
5. Add Events and Counters
6. Select the Output mode
7. Schedule the Subscription
8. Activate Subscription
9. Verify subscription is active, the data is
collected and no errors occurred.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-7
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
7
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create a Event Based Subscription
To open the Create Event
Based Subscription Wizard
window:
— Expand the “Create
Subscription” menu from
the PMIC action bar
— Select a Event Based
Subscription Type from the
list under
“Events/Recording”
— If any subscriptions are
selected in the
Subscription table the
“Create Subscription”
action will not be available
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-8
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
8
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Enter Subscription Details
Enter Name and
Description.
› Add the required subscription Name
Add Topology
› Add an optional subscription Description if desired
Data.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-9
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
9
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Add Subscription Resources – Using Add
Topology Data
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-10
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
10
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Add Subscription Resources - Criteria Based
Subscription
1. Turn on the
“Criteria Based
Subscription”
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-11
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
11
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Add Subscription Output Mode
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-12
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
12
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Add Subscription Counters
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-13
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
13
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Add Subscription Events
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-14
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
14
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Export Counters or Events from a Subscription
— Select the Counters or Events tab on a subscription
— Click on the export icon
— A new window will open with showing the export options ( Open or Save)
— Click the OK button to open or save the exported subscription.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-15
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
15
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Import Counters or Events into a Subscription
— Select the Counters or Events tab on a subscription
— Click on the import icon
— In the importing dialog window select the file to be imported
— Import the file by clicking on Open Button
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-16
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
16
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Save and Activate Subscription
— Subscriptions can be saved and activated later or they can be saved
and activated before exiting the create subscription window
— After saving the subscription, it will appear in the PMIC subscription
table.
— After activating a subscription view the status to ensure that the
subscription is activated without any errors
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-17
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
17
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
EBS-L Cell Trace Subscription
— Cell Trace Subscriptions support the initiation of Cell Trace monitoring for
selected events on selected LTE Radio Nodes.
— The nodes produce either files containing the selected Cell Trace events per
ROP or a stream output towards a specified IP address external to ENM, or
both.
— If a valid license is installed for the EBS-L Value Pack feature, it is possible
to select EBS-L counters to add to the subscription
— The subscription will generate an EBS-L counter file per ROP based on Cell
Trace events available in the Cell Trace files.
— A Cell Trace a subscription can be created as a Criteria Based Subscription
(CBS).
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-18
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
18
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
EBS-L Cell Trace Subscription
1. Add Topology
2. Add EBS Counters
3. Set Output Mode
4. Set UE Fraction
3. Add Events
5. Schedule
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-19
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
19
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
UE Trace Subscription
— UE Trace subscriptions allow the network operator to record event data for
selected UEs travelling through an LTE network.
— Only one UE can be selected for recording for each UE Trace subscription.
— The user identifies the selected UE using the IMSI, IMEI or IMEI (Software
Version) of the UE.
— As the UE is travelling through the network, the SGSN-MME, eNodeB DU
Radio Nodes and eNodeB Baseband Radio Nodes managed by ENM will
either produce event files per ROP, produce a stream output towards a
specified IP address external to ENM, or produce both.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-20
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
20
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create UE Trace Subscription
1. Set Trace Type and Value
3. Set Parameters
4. Schedule
2. Set Output Mode
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-21
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
21
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Event Based Monitoring (EBM)
— EBM Subscriptions support the initiation of Events Based monitoring for selected events on selected
SGSN-MME and vSGSN-MME nodes. The nodes will produce files containing the selected events per
ROP.
— There can only be 1 active EBM/EBSM subscription in the network.
— If a valid license is installed for the EBS-M Value Pack feature, it is possible to select EBS-M counters
in the Create EBM Subscription Wizard.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-22
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
22
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create EBM Subscription
1. Add Topology
2. Add EBS Counters
3. Add Events
4. Set Output Mode
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-23
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
23
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM File Location - LTE
Cell Trace
File
/ericsson/pmic1/CELLTRACE/
UE Trace
File
/ericsson/pmic1/UETRACE/ERBS
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-24
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
24
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Cell Traffic Recording (CTR)
— CTR subscriptions allow the network operator to record event data for up
to 16 UEs, travelling through a selected recording area (cell) in a WCDMA
network.
— There are two predefined scanners present in Radio Network Controller
(RNC) for CTR subscriptions.
— When creating a CTR subscription, the user must select a cell.
— When the subscription is activated, the RNC records the events for the first
16 UEs in the cell which satisfy the selected triggering events.
— A CTR file is generated per active CTR subscription every ROP.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-25
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
25
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create Cell Traffic Recording (CTR)
Subscription
1. Add Topology
3. Add Events
2. Add Cells
4. Add Trigger Events
5. Schedule
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-26
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
26
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
User Equipment Traffic Recording (UETR)
— User Equipment Traffic Recording (UETR) is a recording used to monitor selected performance events
for specific User Equipment (UE) identified by IMSI/IMEI
— UETR subscriptions support the initiation of event monitoring, by a selected RNC, for up to 16
specified UEs, each identified by its IMSI.
— When the UETR subscription is activated, the RNC will start reporting on the selected events and
produce an event file for each UE every ROP.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-27
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
27
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
User Equipment Traffic Recording (UETR)
— Each RNC node has 16 predefined UETR scanners defined (PREDEF.10000.UETR to
PREDEF.10015.UETR
— Each IMSI is used to activate its own UETR scanner. Therefore,each UETR scanner monitors the
events for a particular User Equipment. So there exists a separate UETR file generated by each UETR
scanner.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-28
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
28
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create User Equipment Traffic Recording
(UETR) Subscription
1. Add Topology
3. Add IMSI
2. Set Output Mode
4. Add Events
5. Schedule
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-29
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
29
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
General Performance Events Handling (GPEH)
Subscription
— General Performance Events Handling subscriptions allow the network operator to initiate GPEH
event data collection for selected events for selected RNCs and RBSs.
— When the GPEH subscription is activated, these nodes will start reporting on the selected events and
produce event files every ROP.
— A GPEH subscription can be created as a Criteria Based Subscription (CBS).
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-30
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
30
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
GPEH Subscription
— Event Based subscription applicable to RBS & RNC
— Same subscription for both nodes but activating a RNC subscription
requires selecting cells and UE fraction
For RNC - Resources, Cells, Events,
UE Fraction, Scheduler
CBS supported
For RBS - Resources, Events, Scheduler
CBS supported
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-31
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
31
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
GPEH Subscription Flow
1. Selected "GPEH" Subscription
2. Add Subscription Name and Description
3. Select RNC or RBS nodes using Network Explorer
4. Select the required cell (RNC only) and events
in respective tabs.
5. Adds events from Events Tab.
6. Set the scheduling information . 15 min ROP only
7. Save the Subscription.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-32
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
32
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create General Performance Events Handling
(GPEH) Subscription
1. Add Topology
2. Add Cells
3. Add Events
4. Set UE Fraction
5. Schedule
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-33
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
33
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM File Location - WCDMA
CTR
/ericsson/pmic*/CTR/MeContext=RNC01/A20161118.
0645+00000700+0000_MeContext=RNC01_20001_MeContext=RNC0
1,ManagedElement=1,RncFunction=1,UtranCell=RNC
01-9-3_ctrfile.bin.gz
UETR
/ericsson/pmic*/UETR/SubNetwork=RNC01,MeContex
t=RNC01/A20170420.1445+01001500+0100_SubNetwork=RNC01,MeContext=RNC01_100
00_123456_uetrfile.bin.gz
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-34
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
34
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM File Location - WCDMA
1. Collecting the main file, which is in a compressed binary format.
2. Parsing the main file which has info about sub files.
3. Collecting the sub files which will be located in different path on the Node. For a
single ROP there can/will be multiple sub files.
GPEH
MainFile:/ericsson/pmic*/GPEH/SubNetwork=RNC02RB
S04,MeContext=RNC02RBS04/A20161107.1300+00001315+0000_SubNetwork=RNC02RBS04,MeContext=RNC02R
BS04_rbs_gpehfile_Mp0.bin.gz
SubFiles : In same dir as MainFile
A20161107.1300+00001315+0000_SubNetwork=RNC02RBS04,MeContext=RNC02R
BS04_rbs_gpehfile_Mp1.bin.gz
A20161107.1300+00001315+0000_SubNetwork=RNC02RBS04,MeContext=RNC02R
BS04_rbs_gpehfile_Mp2.bin.gz
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-35
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
35
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Activate, Deactivate, and Delete Subscriptions
— Activate Subscription:
—
—
Select an inactive subscription in the subscription table
Click on the Activate button in the Action Bar.
—Deactivate Subscription:
— Select an active subscription in the subscription table
— Click on the Deactivate button in the Action Bar.
— Delete Subscription:
—
—
Select an inactive subscription in the subscription table
Click on the Delete button in the Action Bar.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-36
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
36
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Trace File Decoding
— Trace files are decoded using the PM Event File Decoder utilities to convert
the trace files from binary format into .csv text files.
— This facilitates further analysis of the content using analysis programs, for
example Excel.
— The Event File Decoder is implemented as a shell command which takes
one encoded binary trace file as input and writes a decoded text file as
output.
— The trace decoders are located on the ENM Scripting Server
— User must have ENM Scripting server rights to access the server
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-37
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
37
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM PM Event File Decoder Documentation
— Instructions on decoding event files are located in the document ENM PM Event File
Decoder in the ENM ALEX library under O&M->Performance.
— Decoding and interpreting results are not covered in this course.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-38
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
38
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Summary
In this module you have learned to:
— Describe the features for managing Event Based Subscriptions in PMIC
— List the type of nodes supported for Event Based Subscriptions in ENM
— Review the common steps for creating a Event Based Subscriptions
— Describe the specific steps for creating different types of Event Based Subscriptions
— Access ENM documentation on how to decode and view the Event Based Subscription results
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Managing Node Event Based Statistics Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 32-39
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
39
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
40
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM 19 Operations for
Radio Access Network
Node KPI Management In ENM
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node KPI Management In ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 33-0
DISCLAIMER
This book is a training document and contains simplifications. Therefore, it must
not be considered as a specification of the system. The contents of this
document are subject to revision without notice due to ongoing progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any
error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
This document is not intended to replace the technical documentation that was
shipped with your system. Always refer to that technical documentation during
operation and maintenance.
© Ericsson AB 2019
This document was produced by Ericsson AB.
The book is to be used for training purposes only and it is strictly prohibited to
copy, reproduce, disclose or distribute it in any manner without the express
written consent from Ericsson.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
0
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Objectives
In this module you will learn to:
— Describe features and functions of the KPI Management Application
— Launch the KPI Management application and access the applications' online application help
— Describe the KPI Management application page layout
— View existing KPIs details and status
— Create, activate, deactivate, and delete KPIs
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node KPI Management In ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 33-1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
1
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
KPI Management Overview
• Monitor the network health using Key
Performance Indicators (KPIs).
• Configure Ericsson Pre-defined KPIs
• Create user defined KPIs.
• Assign nodes to KPIs and activate the KPI
calculation for the nodes.
• View information for the available KPIs
using the Network Health Monitor and
Node Monitor Applications
• Only user with proper ENM user roles can
create or manage KPIs.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node KPI Management In ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 33-2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
2
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
KPI Management Tasks
Create KPIs:
› Create user-defined KPIs and define the node type and reporting object
for the KPI.
› Define the formula to be used to calculate the KPI, using a list of
supported PM counters on the system.
› Define a threshold value for the KPI and indicate the threshold
direction.
› Assign nodes to a KPI.
Edit KPIs:
› Edit user-defined KPIs formulas, thresholds, and nodes.
› Edit Ericsson predefined KPIs thresholds and nodes.
Note: Editing the KPI formula for Ericsson predefined KPIs is not
permitted.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node KPI Management In ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 33-3
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
3
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
KPI Management Tasks
View KPIs:
› View an overview of existing user-defined and Ericsson
predefined KPIs on the system, including their status and number
of assigned nodes.
› View a summary of the KPI formula and the nodes assigned to
the KPI.
Activate / Deactivate KPIs:
› Activate the calculation of a KPI on the assigned nodes.
› Deactivate the calculation of a KPI on the assigned nodes.
Delete KPIs:
› Delete an inactive user-defined KPI.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node KPI Management In ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 33-4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
4
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Launch KPI Management Application
— The KPI Management application link is located in the “Performance
and Optimization” category on the ENM Application Launcher page
— Select the “KPI Management ” link to launch the application
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node KPI Management In ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 33-5
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
5
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
KPI Management Help
1. Expand the
Help Menu
2. Select “App
Help”
3. Select
“Tutorials” to
view tutorials
on KPI
Management
Tasks
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node KPI Management In ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 33-6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
6
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
KPI Management Page Layout
Action Bar
KPI Table
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node KPI Management In ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 33-7
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
7
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
KPI Table Properties
Column Name
Definition
KPI Name
The name of the Key Performance Indicator.
Status
Indicates the status of the KPI calculation. “Active” indicates that the KPI is
calculated for each Reporting Output Period (ROP). “Inactive” indicates that
the KPI is disabled and is not calculated at the ROP
Threshold
A value set for a KPI that is compared to the KPI value to determine if the KPI
has breeched the defined threshold
Reporting Object
The domain Object on which a KPI is reporting. The supported objects are,
EUtranCellFDD, EUtranCellTDD, ENodeBFunction, and NbIotCell
Reporting Node Type
The node type for which the KPI is defined.
Number of Nodes
The number of nodes that an active KPI is calculated for.
Created By
The user name of the user who create KPI. For Ericsson predefined KPIs, the
user name is Ericsson.
Modified
The last date and time the KPI was modified
Modified By
The username of the user who last modified the KPI.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node KPI Management In ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 33-8
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
8
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create KPI - Enter KPI Details
1. Enter the required “KPI Name.”
2. Enter an optional “KPI description”
3. Select “KPI Unit.” from the KPI unit dropdown list
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node KPI Management In ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 33-9
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
9
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create KPI - Select Node Type and Reporting
Object
1. Select the KPI Formula tab
2. Select Node Type from the Node Type dropdown list. Multiple node types can
be selected.
3. Select a Reporting Object from the Reporting Object dropdown list.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node KPI Management In ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 33-10
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
10
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Define KPI Formula Example
1. Click the " ( " button.
2. Click the " @ " button. From the
drop-down list of counters, select
the counter “pmRadioThpVolUl”.
3. Click the " / " button.
4. Click the " @ " button. From the
drop-down list of counters, select
the counter
“pmSchedActivityCellUl”.
5. Click the “ ) ” button.
6. Click the " / “ button.
7. Enter “1000”.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node KPI Management In ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 33-11
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
11
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Aggregate Functions in KPI Formulas
— Click on the Sigma
icon
to select the aggregate
function for the formula
— Select “Across Single
Objects” functions to
aggregate Array/vector
counters
— Array/vector counters are
listed with a “[]” after the
counter name
— Select “Across Multiple
Objects” functions to
aggregate a result across
all cells on a node
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node KPI Management In ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 33-12
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
12
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create KPI - Set System Threshold
To add an optional KPI
Threshold
1. Select “System
Threshold” tab
2. Select “Enable
System Threshold”
3. Select “Smaller
Value is Better” or
“Larger Value is
Better” as
applicable.
4. Enter threshold
value.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node KPI Management In ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 33-13
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
13
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
KPI Management – KPI Alarm
•
•
•
•
Raising an alarm when a KPI
result is in breach of the
configured threshold is optional.
The user must select “Enable FM
Alarm” to raise the alarm when
defining the threshold for the
KPI
If selected, any results in breach
will raise the KPI Result Crossed
the Configured Threshold alarm
The KPI value is shown in the
Alarm Details window for the
KPI Result Crossed the
Configured Threshold alarm
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node KPI Management In ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 33-14
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
14
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create KPI – Add Nodes
To associate nodes to a KPI.
1. Select the “Nodes” tab
2. Click the Add Topology Data dropdown
3. Select nodes from Add Network Object dialog
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node KPI Management In ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 33-15
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
15
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
View KPI Summary
1. Select a KPI from the KPI table.
2. Click “View Summary” in the action bar. The KPI formula and nodes assigned to the
KPI are shown in the KPI Summary.
3. To view summary of another KPI, select a different KPI from the KPI table.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node KPI Management In ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 33-16
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
16
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Activate KPI
1. Select the KPIs to deactivate from the KPI table
2. Click “Activate” on the action bar. The “Activate” button appears
only if one or more selected KPIs are inactive.
3. A success message is displayed on top of the application.
4. To verify, check the “Status” column of respective KPIs for active
status.
5. Nodes must be assigned to a KPI to activate it.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node KPI Management In ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 33-17
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
17
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Deactivate KPI
1. Select the KPIs to deactivate from the KPI table
2. Click “Deactivate” on the action bar. The “Deactivate” button only
appears if one or more selected KPIs are active.
3. A success message is displayed on top of the application.
4. To verify, check the “Status” column the respective KPIs for inactive
status.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node KPI Management In ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 33-18
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
18
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Edit KPI
1. Select the KPI to Edit from the KPI table
2. Click “Edit” in the action bar. The “Edit” button appears only if the
KPI is user defined and inactive.
3. The “Edit KPI” windows opens. The editing process is similar to the
process for “Create KPI.”
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node KPI Management In ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 33-19
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
19
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Delete KPI
1. Select the Inactive KPIs to Delete from the KPI table
2. Click “Delete” on the action bar. The “Delete” button only appears if
one or more selected KPIs are inactive.
3. A success message is displayed on top of the application.
Note: Ericsson Pre-defined KPIs can not be deleted
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node KPI Management In ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 33-20
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
20
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Summary
In this module you have learned to:
— Describe features and functions of the KPI Management Application
— Launch the KPI Management application and access the applications' online application help
— Describe the KPI Management application page layout
— View existing KPIs details and status
— Create, activate, deactivate, and delete KPIs
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node KPI Management In ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 33-21
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
21
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
22
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM 19 Operations for
Radio Access Network
Automatic ID Management Using ENM
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Automatic ID Management Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 34-0
DISCLAIMER
This book is a training document and contains simplifications. Therefore, it must
not be considered as a specification of the system. The contents of this
document are subject to revision without notice due to ongoing progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any
error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
This document is not intended to replace the technical documentation that was
shipped with your system. Always refer to that technical documentation during
operation and maintenance.
© Ericsson AB 2019
This document was produced by Ericsson AB.
The book is to be used for training purposes only and it is strictly prohibited to
copy, reproduce, disclose or distribute it in any manner without the express
written consent from Ericsson.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
0
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Objectives
In this module you will learn to:
— Describe features and functions of the Automatic ID Management (AIDM) application
— Launch the application and access the application’s online help
— Describe the application’s page layout
— View existing AIDM profiles
— Create and edit an AIDM profile
— Describe the process to execute AIDM profiles using manual or scheduled execution
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Automatic ID Management Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 34-1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
1
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Automatic ID Management Overview
— Cellular networks are growing rapidly in size and complexity. New cell types, such as
small cells, are introduced along with existing macro cells.
— To handle this complexity while managing operational costs, Self Organizing
Network (SON) functionality is required to simplify operator tasks and secure
network quality.
— Cell identities (IDs) are used in radio networks as a way for User Equipment (UE) to
distinguish between different cells.
— The number of available IDs is limited and, therefore, they are non-unique in the
network. Consequently, the same ID must be used by several cells.
— Automatic ID Management provides key SON functionality to quickly and
autonomously optimize the IDs and maintain an optimized ID plan in the network.
It allows for fully automatic ID selection and ID conflict resolution.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Automatic ID Management Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 34-2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
2
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Automatic ID Management Features and
Functions
— Automatic ID Management identifies and resolves PCI collisions and confusions.
— A Physical-layer Cell Identity (PCI) collision occurs when adjacent cells have the same PCI and frequency value.
— PCI confusion occurs when one cell is adjacent to two other cells with the same PCI and frequency value.
— The application also detects and resolves optimization issues such as Mod 30 and Blacklist. The application can detect cells that have the same PCI
value over a specified distance.
— Automatic ID Management also provides grouping functionality of PCI values to the following ranges
— Temporary Ranges
— Reserved Ranges
— Topology Group Ranges
— Non-Planned PCI Ranges.
— Automatic ID Management identifies all cells involved in a conflict. It proposes new PCI values which, when applied, resolve the inconsistencies for
PCI conflicts and confusions.
— The new PCI selection is based on available PCI values, ensuring that no other conflicts are introduced as a result of any change.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Automatic ID Management Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 34-3
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
3
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
PCI Collision
RBS A
Collision
RBS B
PCI=10
PCI=10
PCI collision is reported if two related cells have the same
PCI and frequency values.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Automatic ID Management Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 34-4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
4
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
PCI Confusion
RBS A
PCI=7
RBS B
PCI=1
PCI=10
PCI=1
Confusion
PCI confusion is reported if a cell is related to two cells and
both of these cells have the same PCI and frequency values.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Automatic ID Management Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 34-5
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
5
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Launch the Automatic ID Management
Application
— The Automatic ID Management application link is located in the
“Performance and Optimization” category on the ENM Application
Launcher page
— Select the “Automatic ID Management” link to launch the application
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Automatic ID Management Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 34-6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
6
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Automatic ID Management Help
1. Expand the Help
Menu
2. Select “App Help”
3. Select “Tutorials”
to view tutorials
on Automatic ID
Management
Tasks
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Automatic ID Management Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 34-7
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
7
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Automatic ID Management Application Layout
Action Bar
Profile Table
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Automatic ID Management Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 34-8
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
8
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create Profile And Enter Profile Details
1. Click on “Create Profile” from AIDM application page
2. Enter the required Profile Name
3. Enter an optional Profile description if desired
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Automatic ID Management Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 34-9
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
9
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create Profile – Select Profile State
›
The Profile State provides options on how the user wishes to check,
calculate, and resolve conflicts.
›
In “Manual”, check, calculate, and fix are performed while using the
manual execution wizard.
›
In “Open Loop”, checks are done automatically every 15 minutes and
reported to the user.
›
In “Closed Loop”, check, calculate, and fix are done automatically as per
the schedule selected.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Automatic ID Management Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 34-10
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
10
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create Profile Automatic ID Profile State –
Manual
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Automatic ID Management Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 34-11
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
11
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create Profile Automatic ID Profile State –
Open Loop
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Automatic ID Management Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 34-12
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
12
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create Profile Automatic ID Profile State –
Closed Loop
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Automatic ID Management Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 34-13
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
13
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create Profile - Criteria for Check and Calculate
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Automatic ID Management Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 34-14
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
14
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create Profile - Add Topology Data
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Automatic ID Management Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 34-15
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
15
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create a Manual Profile
1. Click “Create Profile” and add the mandatory profile name. The description field is
optional.
2. Select “Manual” from “Automatic ID Profile State.”
3. Select the criteria for check and calculate.
4. Selection of the topology data is optional at this stage. Topology data can also be
selected during manual execution.
5. Click “Save” to finish. The new profile is displayed on the AIDM home page and is ready to
be
executed.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Automatic ID Management Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 34-16
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
16
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create an Open Loop Profile
1. Click on “Create Profile” and add the mandatory profile name. The
description field is optional.
2. For an Open Loop Profile, the “Check for PCI Conflicts" step is automatic. It
happens every 15 minutes. The remaining two steps are manual.
3. Select “Open Loop” from “Automatic ID Profile State.”
4. Select the checks to be carried out when the profile is executed.
5. Select the topology you want to perform check and calculate on from “Add
Topology Data” drop-down. Topology selection is mandatory for Open Loop
Profiles.
6. Click “Save” to finish. The new Open Loop Profile is displayed on the home
page.
7. Automatic ID Management will automatically perform checks every 15
minutes on this Profile. Optionally, the Profile can be manually executed.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Automatic ID Management Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 34-17
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
17
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create a Closed Loop Profile
1. On the home page, click “Create Profile” and add the mandatory profile name. The
description field is optional.
2. For a Closed Loop Profile, all three steps – check, calculate, and resolve – are automatic.
3. Select “Closed Loop” from “Automatic ID Profile State.”
4. Select a schedule option and fix type required.
5. Select the checks to be carried out when the profile is executed.
6. Select the topology to perform check and calculate on from “Add Topology Data” dropdown. Topology selection is mandatory for Closed Loop Profiles.
7. Click “Save” to finish. The new profile is displayed on the home page and is ready to be
executed. Note that the Closed Loop Profile execution status can be viewed in ENM Log
Viewer.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Automatic ID Management Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 34-18
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
18
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Summary
In this module you have learned to:
— Describe features and functions of the Automatic ID Management (AIDM) application
— Launch the application and access the application’s online help
— Describe the application’s page layout
— View existing AIDM profiles
— Create and edit an AIDM profile
— Describe the process to execute AIDM profiles using manual or scheduled execution
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Automatic ID Management Using ENM | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 34-19
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
19
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
20
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM 19 Operations for
Radio Access Network
ENM Node Configuration Using Parameter
Management
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Configuration Using Parameter Management | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 36-0
DISCLAIMER
This book is a training document and contains simplifications. Therefore, it must
not be considered as a specification of the system. The contents of this
document are subject to revision without notice due to ongoing progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any
error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
This document is not intended to replace the technical documentation that was
shipped with your system. Always refer to that technical documentation during
operation and maintenance.
© Ericsson AB 2019
This document was produced by Ericsson AB.
The book is to be used for training purposes only and it is strictly prohibited to
copy, reproduce, disclose or distribute it in any manner without the express
written consent from Ericsson.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
0
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Objectives
In this module you will learn to:
— Describe features and functions of the Parameter Management application
— Launch the Parameter Management application and use the application's online help
— Describe the layout of Parameter Management application
— Use the Parameter Management application view node parameters and make configuration changes
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Configuration Using Parameter Management | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 36-1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
1
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Parameter Management Overview
Provides functions to view and configure
network configuration data
— Provide summary of the statistics for the
Configuration Management Data.
— Parameter Management provides a view of
parameter values across multiple MOs.
— Configuration changes can be made to update
individual or multiple MO instances
— Allow changes to be made directly to the
nodes.
— Allow saving of parameters for later use.
— View Mo Instance summary from collection
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Configuration Using Parameter Management | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 36-2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
2
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Launch Parameter Management
— The Parameter Management application link is located in the
“Provisioning” category on the ENM Application Launcher page
— Select the “Parameter Management ” link to launch the application
— Parameter Management can also be launched from the Cell
Management Application
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Configuration Using Parameter Management | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 36-3
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
3
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Parameter Management Application Layout
Action Bar
Search Panel
Results
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Configuration Using Parameter Management | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 36-4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
4
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Parameter Management Help
•
•
Click on “App
Help” in the
ENM Help
Menu.
Select
“Tutorials” to
list the
available
tutorials
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Configuration Using Parameter Management | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 36-5
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
5
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Parameter Management Setup
1. Select Nodes from Network
Panel
2. Fetch Data for nodes
3. Select Parameters
4. Fetch Data for Parameters
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Configuration Using Parameter Management | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 36-6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
6
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Select Nodes
The Network panel contains the Topology,
Collections and Saved Searches tabs.
•
•
•
The Topology tab is used to select the
required node(s).
The Collection tab displays a list of available
collections. Only one collection can be
selected. The collection can contain up to 500
MO instances.
The Saved Searches tab displays a list of all
available saved search queries. Parameter
Management only supports the selection of
one saved search
.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Configuration Using Parameter Management | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 36-7
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
7
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Fetch nodes for MeContext
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Configuration Using Parameter Management | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 36-8
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
8
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Select Parameters
— Parameters can
be selected by:
— Node Type
— MO Class
— Parameters are
selected by
expanding the MO
class name
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Configuration Using Parameter Management | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 36-9
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
9
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Save Parameters
— Parameters can be
saved to named
Parameter Sets
— Parameter sets are
available to all users
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Configuration Using Parameter Management | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 36-10
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
10
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Load Parameters
Parameters can be
loaded from saved sets
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Configuration Using Parameter Management | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 36-11
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
11
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Delete Parameter Set
Parameters Sets can be delete
by selecting the sets to delete
and clicking on the “Delete
Button”
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Configuration Using Parameter Management | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 36-12
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
12
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
MO Overview
The Overview tab displays the following two sections:
• The Overall MO Overview section displays the number of MO Classes found and
the total number of Objects found for all the MOs.
• The MO Class Breakdown section displays the MO Class Instances count for each
MO. This section contains View Instances link for each MO class. Use the link to
view the MO Instances Data for that MO class
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Configuration Using Parameter Management | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 36-13
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
13
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
MO Class Instance Data – ENodeB Function
Each MO Class Instance tab displays the parameter values found by the search
for the select parameters
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Configuration Using Parameter Management | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 36-14
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
14
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Make Changes to Selected Parameters
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select a parameter in the instance data list
Modify the parameter value
Click on save button in action bar to save the changes
Review and execute changes
Verify changes are successful
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Configuration Using Parameter Management | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 36-15
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
15
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Make Bulk Changes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Select the MOs to
change by selecting
check boxes in list.
Click on the “Edit”
button on Action Bar
Select the Parameter to
change and enter new
value
Click on the “Update”
button
Click on save button in
action bar to save the
changes
Review and execute
changes
Verify changes are
successful
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Configuration Using Parameter Management | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 36-16
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
16
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Summary
In this module you have learned to:
— Describe features and functions of the Parameter Management application
— Launch the Parameter Management application and use the application's online help
— Describe the layout of Parameter Management application
— Use the Parameter Management application view node parameters and make configuration changes
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM Node Configuration Using Parameter Management | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 36-17
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
17
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
18
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM 19 Operations for
Radio Access Network
Node Configuration Using the ENM CLI
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Using the ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 37-0
DISCLAIMER
This book is a training document and contains simplifications. Therefore, it must
not be considered as a specification of the system. The contents of this
document are subject to revision without notice due to ongoing progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any
error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
This document is not intended to replace the technical documentation that was
shipped with your system. Always refer to that technical documentation during
operation and maintenance.
© Ericsson AB 2019
This document was produced by Ericsson AB.
The book is to be used for training purposes only and it is strictly prohibited to
copy, reproduce, disclose or distribute it in any manner without the express
written consent from Ericsson.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
0
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Objectives
In this module you will learn to:
— Describe purpose and function of the cmedit command set
— Describe the cmedit configuration related commands
— Launch the ENM CLI and access the cmedit documentation
— Use cmedit command set to view and edit node configuration data
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Using the ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 37-1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
1
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
cmedit Overview
› The cmedit command set can be used to read,
manipulate, and export configuration
management data.
› All Managed Object (MO) data specified in the
cmedit is modeled.
› The cmedit commands cannot be interrupted
after the command has been entered in the CLI
application.
› The cmedit commands are subject to access
control. Users must have the proper ENM
authority to use the commands.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Using the ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 37-2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
2
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Launch ENM Command Line Interface (CLI)
— The ENM Command Line Interface (CLI) application link is located in
the “Provisioning” category on the ENM Application Launcher page
— Select the “Command Line Interface (CLI)” link to launch the
application
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Using the ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 37-3
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
3
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
cmedit Command Set Help
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Using the ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 37-4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
4
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM CLI – “help cmedit”
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Using the ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 37-5
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
5
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
cmedit Command Descriptions
Command
Command Description
Describe
Describes an MO Class, MO Instance, or any of its attributes
Get
Fetches one or more instances of a Managed Object
Set
Modifies one or more instances of a Managed Object
Create
Creates an instance of an Managed Object
Delete
Deletes one or more instances of an MO
Export
Creates bulk export of node data from a live or non-live
configuration *
Import
Bulk-import MO instances into a live or non-live configuration *
Caution: Set and Delete commands may cause network disturbances
* Export and Import commands will be covered in a separate training module
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Using the ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 37-6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
6
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM CLI Command Scope Examples
cmedit {command} {scope} {MO}
Description
Command
List a specific MO for all
nodes
cmedit get * ManagedElement
List a specific MO for all
nodes which match a
partial node name
cmedit get LTE* ManagedElement
List a specific MO for a
specific node name
cmedit get RNC01 ManagedElement
List a specific MO using a
collection
cmedit get My_Collection ManagedElement
List a specific MO using a
collection and a specific
node
cmedit get My_Collection;BSC102 ManagedElement
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Using the ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 37-7
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
7
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
cmedit Command Options
Option
Command Description
-t or --table
Displays command results in a table format. Use the option with the
“get” command only
-ne or --netype
Specifies a network element type
-ns or --namespace
Specifies a namespace
-v or --version
Specifies a node version.
-c or --config
Operates on MOs) in the specified configuration area.
--force
Forces the command execution. This option is not required when using
scripting integration or batch scripts. It is assumed that all commands in
a script should be executed without user intervention. ENM has a
parameter set by system admin to control how many objects can be
affected without requiring the user to confirm the changes. The force
option overrides the confirmation request. The option can be used with
“set”, “create”,, and “delete” command
-prev or --preview
Previews the Managed object instances affected by the command
-cn or --count
Reports the results as a number of instances. Use the option with the
“get” command only
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Using the ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 37-8
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
8
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
cmedit get by query Command Examples
Description
Example Command
Get all attributes for a specific cmedit get LTE02ERBS00006 EUtranCellFDD.*
MO in list format
Get all attributes for a specific cmedit get LTE* EUtranCellFDD.* ‐t
MO for node names matching
a partial node name in
tabular format
Get a single attribute for a
specific MO Instance
cmedit get LTE02ERBS00006
EUtranCellFDD.qRxLevMin
Get multiple selected
attributes for a MO Instance
in tabular format
cmedit get LTE02ERBS00006
EUtranCellFDD.(freqBand, qRxLevMin,qQualMin
tac,cellBarred) ‐t
Get a single attribute on an
MO Instance using filter
criteria
cmedit get LTE02ERBS00006
EUtranCellFDD.qRxLevMin==‐140
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Using the ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 37-9
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
9
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
cmedit set Command Examples –
EUtranCell(LTE)
Description
Example Command
Set a single attribute on
an MO on a single node
cmedit set ERBS001 EUtranCellFDD qRxLevMin=‐46
Set a single attribute on
an MO Instance on
multiple nodes using filter
criteria
cmedit set ERBS* qRxLevMin=‐46
Set multiple attributes on
a single node
cmedit set ERBS001 EUtranCellFDD qRxLevMin=54,
administrativeState=LOCKED
Caution: Set commands may cause network disturbances
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Using the ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 37-10
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
10
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
cmedit set Command Examples –
NodeBLocalCell (WCDMA)
Description
Example Command
Set a single attribute on
an MO on a single node
cmedit set RBS001 NodeBLocalCell maxNumEulUsers=5
Set a single attribute on
an MO Instance on
multiple nodes using filter
criteria
cmedit set RBS* NodeBLocalCell maxNumEulUsers=7
Set multiple attributes on
a single node
cmedit set RBS001 NodeBLocalCell
maxNumEulUsers=5,administrativeState=
LOCKED
Caution: Set commands may cause network disturbances
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Using the ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 37-11
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
11
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
cmedit set Command Examples – AbisIp(GSM)
Description
Example Command
Set a single attribute on
an MO on a single node
cmedit set BTS01 AbisIP administrativeState=LOCKED
Set a single attribute on
an MO Instance on
multiple nodes using filter
criteria
cmedit set BTS* AbisIP administrativeState=LOCKED
Set multiple attributes on
a single node
cmedit set BTS01 AbisIP
bscBrokeripAddress=10.202.128.4,
administrativeState=LOCKED
Caution: Set commands may cause network disturbances
Note : AbisIp is the child mo of GSM Sector
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Using the ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 37-12
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
12
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
cmedit create Command Examples
Description
Example Command
Create an MO under a
Managed Element.
cmedit create
MeContext=ERBS001,ManagedElement=1,ENodeBFunc
tion=1 ENodeBFunctionId=1
Create a child MO under an
existing MO
cmedit create
MeContext=ERBS001,ManagedElement=1,ENodeBFunc
tion=1,GeraNetwork=1 geranetworkid=1
Change Node type RNC,RBS or Radio Node for WCDMA and
BSC,RBS or Radio Node for GSM
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Using the ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 37-13
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
13
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
cmedit delete Command Examples
Description
Delete MO instances and all
Child Managed Object
Instances
Example Command
cmedit delete LTE001 ENodeBFunction ‐ALL
Delete MO instances and all cmedit delete LTE001
ENodeBFunction.userLabel=="LTE001" ‐‐force
Child Managed Object
Instances using filter criteria
with force option
Change Node type RNC,RBS or Radio Node for WCDMA and
BSC,RBS or Radio Node for GSM
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Using the ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 37-14
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
14
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Summary
In this module you have learned to:
— Describe purpose and function of the cmedit command set
— Describe the cmedit configuration related commands
— Launch the ENM CLI and access the cmedit documentation
— Use cmedit command set to view and edit node configuration data
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Using the ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 37-15
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
15
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
16
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM 19 Operations for
Radio Access Network
Node Configuration Handling Using the ENM CLI
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Handling Using the ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 38-0
DISCLAIMER
This book is a training document and contains simplifications. Therefore, it must
not be considered as a specification of the system. The contents of this
document are subject to revision without notice due to ongoing progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any
error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
This document is not intended to replace the technical documentation that was
shipped with your system. Always refer to that technical documentation during
operation and maintenance.
© Ericsson AB 2019
This document was produced by Ericsson AB.
The book is to be used for training purposes only and it is strictly prohibited to
copy, reproduce, disclose or distribute it in any manner without the express
written consent from Ericsson.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
0
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Objectives
In this module you will learn to:
— Understand the configuration concepts of live and non-live configurations
— List the operations that can be performed on configurations
— List existing configurations.
— Create a non-live configuration
— Activate a non-live configuration
— Compare configurations
— Delete a non-live configuration
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Handling Using the ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 38-1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
1
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Configuration Handling Overview
ENM configuration handling allows a user to modify and
validate configuration data in a non-live configuration area
before activating data in the network:
— A live configuration is the ENM model of the current (live)
configuration of the network:
—Automatically created by ENM
—Cannot be deleted by a user.
— A non-live configuration is the ENM model of a set of
planned changes in the network:
—May be created and deleted by the user.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Handling Using the ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 38-2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
2
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Configuration Handling Work Flow
Create
Non-Live
Configuration
Create an
empty non-live
configuration.
Edit
Non-Live
Verify
Changes
Activate
Configuration
Delete
Non-Live
Make changes
to non-live
configuration
using import or
CLI commands.
Check
differences
between nonlive and live
configurations
to verify
changes
Activate the
configuration to
apply the
changes in nonlive
configuration to
live
configuration.
Delete
non-live
configuration
including its
contents.
Copy
Nodes
Copy node data
to be edited to
the non-live
configuration..
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Handling Using the ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 38-3
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
3
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Configuration Handling Overview
ENM CM Tools
— Configuration: Set of CM data
(Managed Objects, attributes &
values)
— Live Configuration: ENM model of
the current (live) configuration of
the network.
— Non-Live Configuration: Allows
operators to work with CM data
without affecting the configuration
of the live network.
Copy
cmedit
Non-Live
Live
Auto
synch
Push changes
Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Handling Using the ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 38-4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
4
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
config Command Set Help
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Handling Using the ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 38-5
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
5
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Configuration Handling config Command
Descriptions
Command
Command Description
list
List existing configurations
create
Create a configuration
copy
Copy node data from one configuration to another
diff
Compare configurations
history
Shows configuration history
activate
Activate a configuration
delete
Delete a configuration
undo
Undo changes in the live configuration
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Handling Using the ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 38-6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
6
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Configuration – Step 1 Create Non-live
Configuration
Example Command:
config create MyConfig
Example Command Response:
MyConfig successfully created
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Handling Using the ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 38-7
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
7
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Configuration – Step 2 Verify Configuration
Created
Example Command:
config list
Example Command Response:
Live
MyConfig
ConfigDemo
3 config(s)
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Handling Using the ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 38-8
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
8
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Configuration – Step 3 Copy Configuration
Example Command:
config copy ‐‐ne LTE01ERBS00001 ‐‐source live ‐‐target MyConfig
Example Command Response:
Copy nodes started with job ID 1
Example Command:
config copy ‐‐status ‐‐job 1 ‐‐verbose
Example Command Response:
Job status
Job ID
Status
Start dat
e/time
End date/
time
Elapse
d
time
Expected
nodes
copied
Nodes
copied
Nodes
not
copied
Nodes no
match
found
1
COMPLETE
D
2016‐07‐2
6
T11:56:44
2016‐07‐2
6
T11:56:49
0h 0m
5s
1
1
0
0
Node status
Node name
Copy status
LTE01ERBS00001
COPIED
Copy status message
FDN
MeContext=LTE01ERBS00001
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Handling Using the ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 38-9
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
9
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Configuration – Step 4 Make Configuration
Changes
• Make changes to the Non-Live Configuration using the cmedit set command.
• To make the changes, specify the name of the configuration using the
-config option on the cmedit set command.
• When using config option, data will not be affected in the live configuration
• Caution: If the config option is not specified in set command, the changes will
be applied to the live configuration
Example Command:
cmedit set LTE01ERBS00001 EUtranCellFDD.qRxLevMin=‐141 ‐‐config=MyConfig
Example Command Response:
FDN : MeContext=LTE01ERBS00001,ManagedElement=1
1 instance(s) updated
Changes can also be made by importing data into the Non-Live Configuration
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Handling Using the ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 38-10
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
10
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Configuration – Step 5
Compare
Configuration with the Live network
Example Command:
config diff ‐‐target Live ‐‐source MyConfig –‐verbose
Example Command Response:
NE Name
Parent RDN
Object RDN
LTE01ERBS00001 MeContext=LTE01ERBS00001 ManagedElement=1
Attribute Name
Live
MyConfig
qRxLevMin
‐142
‐141
Object FDN
MeContext=LTE01ERBS00001,ManagedElement=1
Config diff completed
• The diff command will list all differences between the target and the source
configurations.
• If the data in the live network has changed since the non-live configuration was
created, any changes to live network will be listed.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Handling Using the ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 38-11
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
11
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Configuration – Step 6 Activate the
Configuration
Example Command:
config activate ‐s MyConfig
WARNING:
Depending on the
attributes that are
changed, activating a
configuration may
affect traffic in the
network
Example Command Response:
Activate configuration started with job ID 4
Example Command:
config activate ‐‐status ‐‐job 4 ‐‐verbose
Example Command Response:
Job status
Job ID
Status
Start date
/time
End date
/time
Elapsed
time
User name
Configuration
Status
detail
4
COMPLETED
2016-07-28
T14:17:25
2016-07-28
T14:17:28
0h 0m 3s
user1
MyConfig
COMPLETED
Applied change results
Change type
Change status
Change status message
FDN
Attribute
modification
COMPLETED
no additional data
MeContext=
LTE01ERBS00001,
ManagedElement=1,
ENodeBFunction=1
Additional
data
Supplied arguments
{qRxLevMin=‐141}
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Handling Using the ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 38-12
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
12
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Configuration – Step 7 Delete Non-live
configuration
Example Command:
config delete MyConfig
Example Command Response:
Delete configuration started with job ID 7
Non-live
Live
Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Handling Using the ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 38-13
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
13
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Summary
In this module you have learned to:
— Understand the configuration concepts of live and non-live configurations
— List the operations that can be performed on configurations
— List existing configurations.
— Create a non-live configuration
— Activate a non-live configuration
— Compare configurations
— Delete a non-live configuration
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Handling Using the ENM CLI | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 38-14
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
14
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
15
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM 19 Operations for
Radio Access Network
Node Configuration Import And Export
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Import And Export | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 39-0
DISCLAIMER
This book is a training document and contains simplifications. Therefore, it must
not be considered as a specification of the system. The contents of this
document are subject to revision without notice due to ongoing progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any
error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
This document is not intended to replace the technical documentation that was
shipped with your system. Always refer to that technical documentation during
operation and maintenance.
© Ericsson AB 2019
This document was produced by Ericsson AB.
The book is to be used for training purposes only and it is strictly prohibited to
copy, reproduce, disclose or distribute it in any manner without the express
written consent from Ericsson.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
0
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Objectives
In this module you will learn to:
— Describe the ENM Configuration export and import features
— Describe the export file formats
— Explain how to create export filters
— Review the configuration export process
— Export a configuration using CLI
— Describe the import file formats
— Review the configuration import process
— Import a configuration using the ENM CLI and Bulk Configuration GUI
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Import And Export | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 39-1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
1
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Bulk Configuration Overview
›
›
›
›
›
ENM Bulk Configuration allows the user to a make a large number of
changes to the network by importing configuration changes into ENM
using files.
ENM supports two types of import files:
› 3GPP xml
› Ericsson Dynamic
To assist the user in creating import files, the configuration data can be
exported in above file formats, modified and then imported into ENM
Import can be performed using either the ENM CLI Import command or
the Bulk Configuration GUI
Pre-Defined and User Defined Export Filter files can also be used to limit
the data that is exported
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Import And Export | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 39-2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
2
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Bulk Configuration Work Flow Using ENM CLI
Create
Non-Live
Copy
Nodes
Export
Configuration
Download
Export File
Edit Export
File
Create an
empty non-live
configuration.
Copy nodes to
be edited to
non-live
configuration.
Perform an
export of the
configuration
using the ENM
CLI
Download the
results of the
configuration
export
Make changes
to exported
configuration
file.
Non-live
Import File
Import the
modified
configuration
file into a nonlive
configuration
Live
Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Import And Export | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 39-3
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
3
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
cmedit export
Exports node data from the
network using the ENM CLI in
two formats:
› Standard 3GPP XML
› Ericsson Dynamic
The command supports:
› Starting of an export job
› Querying the status of an
export job
› Downloading the export file
for a completed job
› Listing the exports available
› Using Pre-defined and Userdefined filters
› Removing completed jobs.
3GPP file format
FDN :
SubNetwork=Readiness,SubNetwork=ERBS,MeContext=LTE0
2ERBS00001,ManagedElement=1,ENodeBFunction=1,EUtran
CellFDD=LTE02ERBS00001-1
qRxLevMin : -130
qRxLevMinOffset : 1000
tac : 1
FDN :
SubNetwork=Readiness,SubNetwork=ERBS,MeContext=LTE0
2ERBS00001,ManagedElement=1,ENodeBFunction=1,EUtran
CellFDD=LTE02ERBS00001-10
qRxLevMin : -130
qRxLevMinOffset : 1000
tac : 1
Dynamic file format
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Import And Export | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 39-4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
4
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Bulk Configuration File Formats
Bulk Configuration 3GPP xml
— The 3GPP file type provides the user with the ability to configure supported
nodes using standard Release 4 3GPP xml file format
Ericsson Dynamic File Format
— Ericsson Dynamic file format is available if ENM has a Dynamic CM Value
Package license.
— The Ericsson Dynamic file format provides the user with the exported data in a
simpler csv file
— The export file can be edited with a text editor or Excel.
— When opening the file in Excel, use a colon as the delimiter for each column to
ensure that attribute names and values are placed in separate column
Both file formats can edited to create an import file.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Import And Export | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 39-5
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
5
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Export Filters
— Two types of export filters are supported for cmedit export
command.
— Pre-Defined
— Created by Ericsson
— Can not be edited
— User Defined
— Created by users
— Can be edited
— The filters limit the data that is exported so users can only
export the required data.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Import And Export | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 39-6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
6
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
List Pre-Defined Export Filters
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Import And Export | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 39-7
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
7
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
User-Defined Export Filters
Filter Description
MO Filter
Export instances
of the specified
MO Class and a
specified
attribute.
<MOClass>.<attr name>
EUtranCellFDD.tac
Filter Example
Export instances
of the specified
MO Class
including all
persisted
attributes.
<MO Class>.*
EUtranCellFDD.*
Export multiple
attributes for the
same MO Class.
<MO Class>
.(<attrname1>,
<attr name2>...)
EUtranCellFDD.(tac,qRxLevMin)
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Import And Export | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 39-8
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
8
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
User-Defined Filter Work Flow
Create
Filter File
Create a
User
Defined
filter file
using a text
editor
Upload
Filter File
Drag the
filter file
into the
ENM CLI
Export
Download
Export File
Export the
filtered
data using
the cmedit
export
command
Download
the results
of the
configurati
on Export
the your
browser
Import File
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Import And Export | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 39-9
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
9
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Dynamic Export File Example Created using a User
Defined Filter
Output Filter
Dynamic Export
Filter Output
EUtranCellFDD.qRxLevMin
EUtranCellFDD.qRxLevMinOffset
EUtranCellFDD.tac
FDN :
SubNetwork=Readiness,SubNetwork=ERBS,MeContext=
LTE02ERBS00001,ManagedElement=1,ENodeBFunction=
1,EUtranCellFDD=LTE02ERBS00001-1
qRxLevMin : -130
qRxLevMinOffset : 1000
tac : 1
FDN :
SubNetwork=Readiness,SubNetwork=ERBS,MeContext=
LTE02ERBS00001,ManagedElement=1,ENodeBFunction=
1,EUtranCellFDD=LTE02ERBS00001-10
qRxLevMin : -130
qRxLevMinOffset : 1000
tac : 1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Import And Export | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 39-10
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
10
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
3GPP Export File Example Created using a User
Defined Filter
Output Filter
EUtranCellFDD.qRxLevMin
EUtranCellFDD.qRxLevMinOffset
EUtranCellFDD.tac
3GPP
Export
Filter
Output
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Import And Export | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 39-11
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
11
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Export a Dynamic File
Export in Dynamic format with data for a selected node from the live configuration
Example Command:
cmedit export ‐n LTE02ERBS00001 ‐‐filetype dynamic ‐‐jobname export_LTE02ERBS00001
Example Command Response:
Export job export_LTE02ERBS00001 started with job ID 21
Export in Dynamic format with data for a selected node from the live configuration using
filter file
Example Command:
cmedit export ‐n LTE02ERBS00001 ‐‐filetype dynamic ‐f file:FDD_Filter.txt
‐‐jobname export_LTE02ERBS00001
Example Command Response:
Export job export_LTE02ERBS00001 started with job ID 22
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Import And Export | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 39-12
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
12
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
cmedit export
Check Job Status
After executing the cmedit export, check the status of the export job using the
job id returned in command response to check if the export is complete
Example Command:
cmedit export ‐st ‐‐job 21
Example Command Response:
Job status
Job ID
Job name
Status
21
export_LTE02ERBS00001 COMPLETED
Nodes exported
1
Nodes not exported
0
Start date/time
2016‐07‐25T13:29:45
Nodes no match found
0
End date/time
2016‐07‐25T13:29:46
Elapsed time
0h 0m 0s
MOs exported
5137
File name
/ericsson/batch/data
/export/dynamic_export
/export_LTE02ERBS00001.zip
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Import And Export | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 39-13
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
13
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
cmedit export
Download Export File
To download the exported file to the browser, use the job id returned from the cmedit export command
Example Command:
cmedit export ‐dl ‐j 21
Example Command Response:
downloading...
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Import And Export | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 39-14
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
14
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
cmedit export Remove Job
•
•
•
To remove a specified export job use the cmedit export –rm option.
When an export job is removed, both the generated export file and all job data
are removed from the system.
Use the job from the cmedit export command
Example Command:
cmedit export ‐rm –j 21
Example Command Response:
Export job was successfully removed.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Import And Export | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 39-15
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
15
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Import Configuration File Work Flow Using
ENM CLI
Import File
Create
Import File
Upload
Filter File
Import
Verify
Import
Create
import file
using a text
editor
or
Edit the
data in an
export file
Drag the
import file
into the
ENM CLI
Import the
using the
cmedit
import
command
Verify the
Import is
successful
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Import And Export | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 39-16
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
16
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Dynamic Import File Format
— The Dynamic file format is an Ericsson proprietary file format
— The Dynamic import file supports 4 operations:
— Create: creates specified managed objects
— Set: sets attribute values for specified managed objects
— Delete: deletes specified managed objects
— Action: performs actions on the specified managed objects
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Import And Export | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 39-17
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
17
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Example Dynamic Import File
#Create relations
create
FDN : SubNetwork=Stockholm,MeContext=Stk1,…,EUtranCellRelation=33 EUtranCellRelationId : 33
neighborCellRef : "SubNetwork=Stockholm,MeContext=Stk1,…,ExternalEUtranCellFDD=1-1"
#Update cell 1-1
set
FDN :SubNetwork=Stockholm,MeContext=Stk1,..,ENodeBFunction=1,EUtranCellFDD=1
EUtranCellFDD.qRxLevMin : -46
EUtranCellFDD.qRxLevMinOffset: : 20
EUtranCellFDD.tac : 30
#Delete problem relation
delete
FDN : SubNetwork=Stockholm,MeContext=Stk1…,EUtranCellRelation=32
#Change cell frequency
action
FDN : SubNetwork=Stockholm,MeContext=Stk1,..,ENodeBFunction=1,EUtranCellFDD=1-1
changeFrequency earfcn : 5000 #Modify cell 1-1 again set FDN :
SubNetwork=Stockholm,MeContext=Stk1,..,ENodeBFunction=1,EUtranCellFDD=1-1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Import And Export | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 39-18
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
18
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
cmedit import Import Configuration
Step 1: Drag and drop the file to be imported into the ENM CLI.
Example Drag and Drop Response:
DRAG
3gppImportFile.xml added to workspace
DROP
Step 2: Run the command:
Example 1: Import the data file in 3GPP format into a users configuration
Example Command:
cmedit import file:3gppImportFile.xml ‐‐filetype=3GPP ‐‐config=MyConfig
Example Command Response:
Import started with job ID 1
Example 2: Import the data file in dynamic format into a users configuration
Example Command:
cmedit import file:DynamicFile.txt ‐‐filetype=dynamic ‐‐config=MyConfig
Example Command Response:
Import started with job ID 2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Import And Export | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 39-19
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
19
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
cmedit import Check Job Status
After executing the cmedit import, verify the status of the import job using the job id
returned in command response. The operations completed can be reviewed in the
results.
Example Command:
cmedit import ‐‐status ‐‐job=36 ‐‐verbose
Example Command Response:
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Import And Export | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 39-20
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
20
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Bulk Configuration Application Overview
— Bulk Configuration is a web-based
application launched from the ENM
Launcher page.
— The application allows a user to bulk
import configuration management (CM)
data to the live network, which involves
adding and/or modifying large amounts
of network data.
— Import files can be 3GPP or Ericsson
dynamic file format.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Import And Export | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 39-21
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
21
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Launch Bulk Configuration
— The Bulk Configuration application link is located in the “Provisioning”
category on the ENM Application Launcher page
— Select the “Bulk Configuration ” link to launch the application
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Import And Export | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 39-22
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
22
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Bulk Configuration Application Layout
Action Bar
Job List
Job Summary
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Import And Export | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 39-23
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
23
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Bulk Configuration Help
•
•
Click on “App
Help” in the
ENM Help
Menu.
Select
“Tutorials” to
list the
available
tutorials
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Import And Export | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 39-24
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
24
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Job Summary
•
The Job Summary contains a Details tab and an Overview tab
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Import And Export | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 39-25
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
25
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Job Details
•
View the job details by:
• Selecting a job from the job list and select View Job Details from the action
bar
• Selecting a job from the job list and select View Job Details from the Job
Summary
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Import And Export | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 39-26
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
26
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Import Configuration File Work Flow – Bulk
Configuration
Import File
Create
Import File
Create a
Import Job
Create import
file using a text
editor
or
Edit the data in
an export file
Select Create a
Job button
from Bulk
Configuration
action Bar and
complete the
parameters on
Create a Job
dialog window.
Verify
Import
Import
Verify the
Import is
successful by
checking
status in job
list and
viewing details
in the Job
Details
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Import And Export | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 39-27
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
27
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Create a Import Job
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Select Create a job
from action bar
Enter Job Name
Select import file
Select Validation
Options
Select Execution
Error Handling
Options
Select Execution
Order
Select Create and
start
Import File
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Import And Export | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 39-28
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
28
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Validate Job Completion
1.
2.
View Job state
and summary
details in job list
and Job
Summary
Click on View
Details to view
job results
Import File
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Import And Export | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 39-29
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
29
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Summary
In this module you have learned to:
— Describe the ENM Configuration export and import features
— Describe the export file formats
— Explain how to create export filters
— Review the configuration export process
— Export a configuration using CLI
— Describe the import file formats
— Review the configuration import process
— Import a configuration using the ENM CLI and Bulk Configuration GUI
© Ericsson AB 2019 | Node Configuration Import And Export | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 39-30
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
30
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
31
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM 19 Operations for
Radio Access Network
ENM RAN Node Auto Provisioning
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM RAN Node Auto Provisioning | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 40-0
DISCLAIMER
This book is a training document and contains simplifications. Therefore, it must
not be considered as a specification of the system. The contents of this
document are subject to revision without notice due to ongoing progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any
error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.
This document is not intended to replace the technical documentation that was
shipped with your system. Always refer to that technical documentation during
operation and maintenance.
© Ericsson AB 2019
This document was produced by Ericsson AB.
The book is to be used for training purposes only and it is strictly prohibited to
copy, reproduce, disclose or distribute it in any manner without the express
written consent from Ericsson.
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
0
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Objectives
In this module you will learn to:
— Verify the contents of an Auto Provisioning Project ZIP file
— Provision an eNodeB using the AP command set in ENM CLI
— Download the artifacts generated by AP for the purpose of commissioning a node
— Describe the tree commissioning scenarios
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM RAN Node Auto Provisioning | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 40-1
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
1
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM Auto Provisioning
— The ENM takes as input an AP Project ZIP that contains the new node's
configuration for O&M, Equipment, Antenna, Radio Network, and
Transport Network
— The ENM then creates the on-site files used during on-site node
commissioning. These include the Site Basic, Site Equipemnt, and Site
Installation files
— The ENM then waits for the node to make contact after the on-site
configuration is complete and the node is ready for its Radio and Transport
configuration
— After the commissioning is complete the ENM will monitor the node for CM,
PM, FM and Inventory Management
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM RAN Node Auto Provisioning | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 40-2
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
2
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM Auto Provisioning
Prepare a Project ZIP File
— The AP Project ZIP file is generated from tools outside of the ENM
— The contents of the AP Project include:
— projectInfo.XML file defining information related to the project as a whole.
— A Directory for each eNodeB that is being defined in this AP project.
— A nodeInfo.xml file for each node being provisioned that specifies node Auto Provisioning options and
artifacts (the other XML files in the node subdirectory)
— Node specific artifacts that specify information pertaining to Site Equipment, Transport Network, Radio
Network
[APProjectExample.zip]
> projectInfo.xml
> LTE05ERBS00015 / nodeInfo.xml
> LTE05ERBS00015 / siteBasic.xml
> LTE05ERBS00015 / siteEquipment.xml
> LTE05ERBS00015 / siteInstall.xml
> LTE05ERBS00015 / RadioNetwork.xml
> LTE05ERBS00015 / TransportNetwork.xml
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM RAN Node Auto Provisioning | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 40-3
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
3
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM Auto Provisioning Load Project ZIP File
Into Browser
— Drag Project ZIP File from Explorer into ENMCLI
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM RAN Node Auto Provisioning | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 40-4
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
4
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM Auto Provisioning
Order the Project File
— Order the import of the Project by issuing the following command from the
ENM CLI:
>> ap order file:<Project ZIP File Name>.zip
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM RAN Node Auto Provisioning | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 40-5
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
5
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM Auto Provisioning
Status the Project
— Status the project to see progress and indicate failures:
>> ap status -p <Project Name>
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM RAN Node Auto Provisioning | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 40-6
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
6
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM Auto Provisioning
Status the Project
— Status the node to see failure details:
>> ap status -n <Node Name>
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM RAN Node Auto Provisioning | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 40-7
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
7
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM Auto Provisioning
Download the Site Install File
— Download the Site Installation file from ENM
— Execute the following command from the ENM CLI to download the Site Installation
file that will be used during the initial turn-up of the site:
>> ap download -o -n <Node Name>
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM RAN Node Auto Provisioning | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 40-8
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
8
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
RbsSiteInstallationFile
— The Site Install file provides the node with O&M IP
configuration and details on where to fetch the RBS Summary
file
<RbsSiteInstallationFile xmlns:xsi="<http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance>" xsi:noNamespaceSchemaLocatio
n="SiteInstallation.xsd">
<Format revision="K"/>
<InstallationData logicalName="LTE01ERBS00015" vlanId="3100" rbsIntegrationCode="">
<OamIpConfigurationData ipAddress=“10.200.0.2"
subnetMask="255.255.240.0" defaultRouter0="10.200.0.1">
<DnsServer ipAddress="10.212.100.10"/>
</OamIpConfigurationData>
<SmrsData address=“10.10.72.156" summaryFilePath="/SMRS/LRAN/LTE01ERBS00015/RBS
Summary.xml" userName="%user_name%" password="%password%"/>
</InstallationData>
</RbsSiteInstallationFile>
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM RAN Node Auto Provisioning | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 40-9
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
9
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM Auto Provisioning
Status the Project Failure
— AP Project Failure
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM RAN Node Auto Provisioning | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 40-10
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
10
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
ENM Auto Provisioning
Status Node Integration Failure
— AP Node Failure Details
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM RAN Node Auto Provisioning | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 40-11
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
11
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Commissioning Scenarios
1. Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT)
Integration (One Touch)
2. Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT)
Integration , On-Site Configuration
3. Zero Touch Integration, Manual Bind
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM RAN Node Auto Provisioning | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 40-12
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
12
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Some manual On-site steps are
required
1. Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT)
Integration
Configuration files
and packages are
created and
uploaded to SMRS
An LMT with Site Installation
file is
bought to the site
Integration is Initialized
using the Site Installation
File
Remaining configuration
files are uploaded from the
SMRS
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM RAN Node Auto Provisioning | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 40-13
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
13
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
AutoProvisioning LMT
Integration
LTE DU Radio (ERbs)
View Node or Project
Integration Status
Prepare
Rollout
Project
CLI
Project.zip
Network Engineer/
Planner
Download
SiteInstallation
File
ENM Operator
Wait for NodeUp
End
Order Node/Project
Store Node
Artifacts
Create ENM Node
Management and
Connectivity MOs.
Copy Node
Configuration
Artifacts to SMRS
Generate
Certificates/
Credentials
Integrate Node
SMRS
Store
Node Up
Data
Store
ENM
Security
Synch
Import Configs
Act Opt Features*
GPS Check*
Unlock Cells*
Create CV*
Get Config
Files
ENM
Site
Hello
SiteInstall
Switch on Node
Field Engineer
* Optional
Install and Start
Integration
Certificate Enrollment
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM RAN Node Auto Provisioning | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 40-14
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
14
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Manual On-site steps Including
upload of artifacts required
2. Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT)
Integration, On-Site Configuration
All configuration files
and packages are
loaded on an LMT
device and carried
to the site
Site Installation file is used
to Initialize Integration
Rest of the configuration
files are uploaded form the
LMT
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM RAN Node Auto Provisioning | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 40-15
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
15
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
AutoProvisioning LMT
Integration
LTE DU Radio (ERbs),
On site Configuration
View Node or Project
Integration Status
Prepare
Rollout
Project
CLI
Project.zip
Network Engineer/
Planner
Download
all Config Artifacts
File
ENM Operator
Wait for NodeUp
End
Order Node/Project
Store Node
Artifacts
Create ENM Node
Management and
Connectivity MOs.
Copy Node
Configuration
Artifacts to SMRS
Generate
Certificates/
Credentials
Integrate Node
SMRS
Store
Node Up
Data
Store
Synch
Import Configs
Act Opt Features*
GPS Check*
Unlock Cells*
Create CV*
ENM
Security
ENM
Site
Upload Config
Files
Hello
SiteInstall
Switch on Node
Field Engineer
* Optional
Install and Start
Integration
Certificate Enrollment
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM RAN Node Auto Provisioning | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 40-16
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
16
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Manual Binding executed via
ENM CLI .
3. Zero Touch Integration, Manual Bind
The node and required
network services are
prepared during network
and node provisioning
phases so that all on-site
activities are
automated
Integration process is
initiated when the node is
powered on at site and
continues automatically
until the node is integrated
in the network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM RAN Node Auto Provisioning | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 40-17
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
17
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
AutoProvisioning Zero
Touch Integration
Manual Bind
LTE DU Radio (Erbs)
View Node or Project
Integration Status
Prepare
Rollout
Project
CLI Hardward Bind
CLI
Project.zip
Network Engineer/
Planner
ENM Operator
Wait for NodeUp
End
Store Node
Artifacts
Create ENM Node
Management and
Connectivity MOs.
Copy Node
Configuration
Order Node/Project
Artifacts to SMRS
Copy SiteInstall
to AIWS
Generate
Certificates/
AIWS
Credentials
Integrate Node
SMRS
Store
Node Up
Data
Store
Download
SiteInstall
ENM
Security
Get Config
Files
ENM
Site
Hello
AIWS : Auto Integrate Web Service
* Optional
AutoProvisioning Procedure
Synch
Import Configs
Act Opt Features*
GPS Check*
Unlock Cells*
Create CV*
DHCP
Field Engineer
g
Switch on Node
Certificate Enrollment
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM RAN Node Auto Provisioning | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 40-18
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
18
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
Summary
In this module you have learned to:
— Verify the contents of an Auto Provisioning Project ZIP file
— Provision an eNodeB using the AP command set in ENM CLI
— Download the artifacts generated by AP for the purpose of commissioning a node
— Describe the tree commissioning scenarios
© Ericsson AB 2019 | ENM RAN Node Auto Provisioning | LZU1082810 R1A | Figure 40-19
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
19
ENM 19 Operations for Radio
Access Network
© Ericsson AB 2019 | LZU1082810 R1A
20
Intentionally Blank
Ericsson AB
Stockholm, Sweden
Telephone: +46 10 719 0000
www.ericsson.com/ourportfolio/services/learning-services
© Ericsson AB 2019
LZT1382192 Uae R1A